ONESOURCE®

USER GUIDE

v2016 as of Q1 2017


Date of issue: February 15, 2017

TAX PROVISION


Getting Started With Tax Provision 14

Platform & Support's Customer Center 15

Tax Provision Concepts 16

..........................................

Overview of Provision Calculations 17

................................

ONESOURCE Tax Provision 18

....................

CONTENTS

Data Navigation Bar 19

Codes

. 20

...........

System Codes

. 21

..

Components

Datasets 22

.........

Reporting Datasets

. 23

....................

. 23

Units

. 24

.................

Sub-Consolidations

Included for State 25

....................

. 26

.......

Filing Group 27

......

Tag Letters 27

...........................

Classes and Subclasses 28

.......................

Manage Attachments 30

.....................

Records - Unit/State 31

......................

Global Access

Current/Non-Current 32

...........

Parameters

. 33

.......

Audit Trail

. 34

.....

Reporting Levels

. 35

................

Currency

. 36

..

Deferred Rollforwards

. 37

.........................

Roll-up Codes

. 38

............

PTBI Policies

. 38

.........

Data Refresh

. 39

..........

. 39

................

Common Actions 40

My Datasets 41

........................

My Datasets Interface

. 42


...........................

My Datasets for Review

. 43

......................

Viewing All Datasets 44

...........................

Creating My Review List 45

..............

Dataset Actions 46

........

Review 47

............

Calculate 47

............................................

More - Dataset Administration 52

CONTENTS

Units 95

..........................

Manage Units Interface 96

..........

Manage Units 97

........................

Activate All Units 98

........

Unit Actions 98

..........................

Lock/Unlock Units 99

...............................

More - Unit Administration 99

..............................................

Setting up Unit Administration 100

............................

Unit Journal Entries 101

.....................................

Unit Dataset Parameters 106

...............

Unit Rates 107

..............

Unit Other 113

.....................

Unit Properties 118

........

Jurisdictions 127

.........................

Add Jurisdictions 128

........................

Edit Jurisdictions 129

Review & Edit 136

...........................

Review & Edit Interface

. 137

..............

Summary Page 138

.......................

Comparing Datasets 140

.......

Leadsheets 141

....................................

Comparing Lead Sheet Data 143

Data Entry 145

......................

Data Entry Interface 146

...............................................

Adding Data Entry Components 147

...............................................

Editing Data Entry Components 148

..................................................

Deleting Data Entry Components 148

...................

Attachments 149

.......

Data Entry 150


...............................................................

After Tax Temporary Differences -Tax Basis 151

..........................................................................

After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155

..............................

APIC Pool Amounts 159

....................

Forecast PTBI 161

.................................

Flow-Through Factors 163

................................................

Intercompany Transaction Entry 164

.........................................................

NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167

...................

Payable Entry 171

..................................................

CONTENTS

Permanent Differences - Tax Basis 174

...........................................................

Permanent Differences - Book/Tax Basis 177

...............................

Pre-Tax Book Income 181

.........................

Tax Adjustments 184

..................................................

Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187

............................................................

Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196

...................................

Trial Balance /Tax Basis 201

...............................

State Specific Data Entry 203

............................................................................................

State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204

..........................................................................

State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 209

..........................................

State Permanent Differences 214

............................

State Payable Entry 217

..................................

State Tax Adjustments 220

...........................................................

State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224

..................................

Data Entry Component List 229

Reporting 230

......................

Reporting Interface

List of Reports

. 230

..............

. 232

...........

Format

Run a Report 233

..

Report Options

. 234

...............

. 235

.....................

Class Options 236

........

My Reports 237

..............................................

Creating User-Defined Reports 238

...........................................................

Applying Multiple Datasets to a Report 239

..........................................................................

Applying Units/Sub-Conslidations/Filing Groups 240

...............

Batch Reports

Shared Reports 241

.............

. 241

Save Options

Notes 242

............

. 243


.....................

Page Setup Option 245

........

Page 246

............

Margins 247

......................

Header/Footer 247

.........

Sheet 248

.................

Reporting Hyperlinks

Printing Reports 249

.........................

. 249

..............................................................

CONTENTS

Reporting Overview & Reference Information 251

............................................

Self Reconciliation of Reports 253

...................................

Parameters for Reports 253

........................

Tax Provision Report 255

...........................................

Tax Provision Unit Summary 255

......................................................

Tax Provision (Estimated Payments) 257

................................

Interim Tax Provision 258

...................

Tax Provision 261

...............................................

Tax Provision Unit Comparison 263

.........................................

Tax Provision GAAP - STAT 264

.........................................................................

Tax Provision GAAP - STAT Dataset Comparison 267

.........

FERC 268

................................

Effective Tax Rate Report 270

..........................

Effective Tax Rate 270

..........................................................

Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison 273

................................................

Effective Tax Rate CSC Breakout 274

........................................

Effective Tax Rate (Interim) 275

....................

Deferred Balances 277

....................................

Foreign\Domestic Summary 280

............................

Tax Accounts Summary 282

...................

Deferred Support 284

.......................................

Temporary Diffs Summary 284

....................................................................

Temporary Diffs Summary (Fed Filing Group) 286

...................................

Temp Diffs Discrepancy 287

....................................................

Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities 288

......................................

Deferred Book/Tax Detail 291

.....................

NOL Balances 292

.........................

NOLs Expiration 294

...............................

Deferred Workpaper 295

............

Flow Through 297

...........

Trial Balance 298

....................................

Tax Basis Balance Sheet 298


...........................................

Tax Basis Income Statement 300

...................

Trial Balance 301

..................................................

Trial Balance - Income Statement 302

.............

Other Reports 303

....................................................

Tax Expense on Income Statement 303

....................................

Effective Tax Rate Detail 303

...............................

APIC Pool Summary 304

...............................

Attachments Review 306

.............

CONTENTS

State Support 307

...................................

Federal Benefit of State 307

.............................

Provision Summary 309

..............................

State/Unit Summary 310

..........................

Deferred Balances 311

...................................

Expected Deferred Rate 313

.......................................

State Estimated Payments 314

.............................

Forecast State Rate 315

State

. 317

...................

Tax Provision 318

..............................

Legacy Tax Provision 321

...........................

Deferred Balances 324

...............................

Payable Rollforward 326

.....................

Payable Detail 327

......................................................

Tax Provision - Estimated Payments 328

.................................................................

Legacy Tax Provision (Estimated Payments) 330

.......................................

State Estimated Payments 332

.........................

Interim Provision 333

.................................................

State Inclusion Summary Report 335

...

Payable 335

...............................

Payable Rollforward 335

.....................

Payable Detail 337

................................................................

Tax Adjustments Payable Mapping Report 339

...........

Journal Entry 339

.............

Global Access 340

............................

Sign-Off Summary 340

................................................

Sign-Off Summary Comparision 340

.................

Forecast Rate

Forecast True Up 341

.............

. 342

...................................

Federal Estimated Payments

Forecast Deferred Provision 345

......................................

. 346


.......

Unit 346

...............

Summary 348

..............

AMT Estimator 348

......................................

Local Currency Approach 349

.............................................

Reporting Currency Approach 350

.............

Legacy Reports

Administration 351

................

. 352

....................................

CONTENTS

Viewing Legacy Reports 352

Analysis 355

.....................

Dashboard

Accessing Analysis 355

........

. 357

..............................

Dashboard Toolbar 358

...........................

Using Bookmarks 359

.....................................................

Exporting a Dashboard for Viewing 366

....................

Report Repository 368

.............................................

ONESOURCE Default Reports 368

.................

My Analysis 370

.......................

Shared Analysis 370

.

Design 370

Workpapers 371

Settings 373

............................

Excel Add-in Download 375

Administration 376

............................

Manage Datasets

Administration Interface 377

...................

. 378

.............

Datasets 379

..........................

Analysis Datasets 403

.............................

.Reporting Datasets 404

........................

.Interim Datasets 406

..........................................

.View Reporting Dataset Log 408

...................................

.Manage Active Datasets 409

........................................

Active Workpaper Mapping 410

............

Manage Units 417

.......

Units 417

.....................................

Unit Sub-Consolidations 419

.................................

Pre-Tax Book Income 422


..................................

Permanent Differences 423

..................................

Temporary Differences 424

..........................................

NOL Temporary Differences 426

................................................

After Tax Temporary Differences 427

..........................

Tax Adjustments 428

.........................................

Intercompany Transactions 429

..........................

Manage Trial Balance 430

............................

CONTENTS

Trial Balance Lines 430

................................

Trial Balance Sublines 431

.................................................

Import Master Chart of Accounts 433

......................

Manage Tax Return 434

.................................

Tax Return Mappings 434

..........................

Export Mappings 435

..........................

Import Mappings 435

...............

Manage States 436

..........

States 436

.................

State Types 437

.......................................

State After Tax Temp Diffs 437

........................................

State After App Temp Diffs 438

..................................

State Tax Adjustments 439

................

Manage Bridge 440

................................

Pre-Tax Book Income 441

....................

Tax Accounts 442

.................................

Perm Diffs - Tax Basis 443

..........................................

.Temp Diff Activity - Tax Basis 444

..............................................

.Temp Diff BSO Adjs - Tax Basis 445

.........................................

.Perm Diffs - Book/Tax Basis 446

..................................................

Temp Diff Activity Book/Tax Basis 447

....................

.Trial Balances 448

....................

.Unit Mapping 449

..................

Manage Payable 450

....................................................

.Manage Payable Transaction Types 450

.....................................

.Manage Payable Rollups 450

.....................................

Manage Payable Buckets 451

.......................................

Export Payable Categories 451

..........................

Manage Data Options 452

.............................

Classes/Subclasses 452

....................

Manage Tags 457

..

System 457

......................................................

.Manage Global Access Components 458


.....................

.Manage Users 459

...........................................

.Manage Global Attachments 468

....................

.Login History 468

.............................................

.Manage Countries/Currencies 469

..............................................

Manage Deferred Rollforwards 470

........................................

Manage NOL Rollforwards 473

........................................

Manage IFRS Rollforwards 476

...........................................................

Manage Temp Diff Postings (Tags Only) 478

.........................

CONTENTS

.Manage Licenses 480

...................................

Manage Configurations 481

..........................................

Manage Restricted Features 534

.........................

Manage Rollups 536

....................................

Manage User Questions 537

.......................

Plugin Reports 538

...................................

.Journal Entry Summary 540

.......

Audit Trail 542

.....................................................

View Numbers Data Source History 543

......................................................

.View Categories Data Source History 545

Help 546

Documentation 546

......................................................

Integration with ONESOURCE Fileroom 547

..................................................................

Adding Documents to ONESOURCE FileRoom 547

Jobs 551

..........................

Jobs Interface - Part 1

. 552

..........................

Jobs Interface - Part 2 553

.....

Log Files 554

Importing 555

.....................

My Dataset Import 556

............................................

.Spreadsheet Import - Dataset 556

.............

Bridge Import 562

......................

.Bridge Process 565

.................................................................

ONESOURCE Import from Other Applications 568

...........................

.Return Worksheet 569

......................................

ONESOURCE Income Tax 571

.....................................................

ONESOURCE State Apportionment 576

....................................................

ONESOURCE Estimated Payments 579


....................

Data Entry Import 588

.................

Category Import 589

..........................................

Import Categories Template 591

.........................................

Import Reporting Datasets 592

..................

Import Mappings 592

Exporting 593

.................

Export Datasets

CONTENTS

. 594

................

Export Data Entry

Export All Units 596

....................

Export Categories

. 598

....................

. 600

..............................

Export Bridge Mappings 602

Functionality 603

...............................

Alternative Minimum Tax 604

....................................................

.AMT Reporting Currency Approach 605

.............................................

.AMT Local Currency Approach 606

.................................

NOL Automation - Federal 607

..............

.Scenarios 609

..............

Scenario 1 610

..............

Scenario 2 611

...............

Scenario 3 612

...............

Scenario 4 613

...............

Scenario 5 614

...............

Scenario 6 615

...............

Scenario 7 616

...............

Scenario 8 617

...............

Scenario 9 618

.................

Scenario 10 619

.....................

Current Issues 619

.............

Flow-Through 620

.........................

Manage Licenses 621

.....................................................

Flow-Through Classes & Subclasses 621

..................................

Flow-Through Profiles 622

..................................

Unit - Target | Sources 626

......................................................

Calculate Flow-Through - Manually 629

....................

Review & Edit 630

...............

Reporting 630

......

Jobs 631

............

Settings 631


............................

Dataset Parameter 631

...................................

Manage Configurations 632

.....................................................................................

Using the Flow-Through functionality with Tag Datasets 635

...................

Terminology 642

.............................

Foreign Currency Issues 643

..........................................

Currency Types and Options 643

....................................

.Foreign Exchange Rates 644

.............................................................

CONTENTS

.Change in Rate and Currency Translation 644

...............................................................

.Combining Units with Different Currencies 648

.................................................

.Currency Translation Adjustment 648

...................

Interim Reporting 660

...............................

.Interim Functionality 660

.............

Forecast 663

..........

Actual 667

.......................

.Interim Process 669

.............................

Interim Multi States 671

..............

Journal Entries 673

.........................

Core Calculation 674

....................................................

Simple Journal Entry (default view) 675

.................................

Custom Journal Entry 676

...........................

Custom JE Report 676

........................................

Configurable Journal Entry 677

................................

Journal Entry Profiles 679

....................................................

.Journal Entries System Parameters 689

..................................................

.Additional Configuration Options 690

...............................................

Journal Entry Standard Reports 691

...........................................................................................

T..a..x..A...c.c..o..u..n..t.s....................................

Example of Journal Entry Data - Support for a complex set of 693

.Example - Journal Entry Calculations 694

....

Payable 696

.......................

.Exchange Rates 699

........................................

Automatic Payable Posting 701

...........................

Payable Reclasses 702

........................

Report Configuration 708

.........................................................

Custom Sub-Consolidation Reporting 708

..............................

Headers and Footers 710

.................................

Stock Based Compensation 711

..............

APIC Pool 712

.............................................................

Tax Basis Balance Sheet/Income Statement 712

..........................

Trial Balance Data 713


...................................................

Cumulative Temporary Differences 713

.............................

True Up to Return (RTP) 714

....................................

Single Dataset Approach 714

........................................

Multiple Dataset Approach 715

..................

RTP Posting 716

.......................

Valuation Allowance 726

....................................

Separate Attribute Basis 727

.........................................

CONTENTS

Aggregated Attribute Basis 728

.......................................................

Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis 728

................................................................................

Converting from Aggregated to Aggregated Post-Tax 729

...........................................................................

Associated ONESOURCE Tax Provision Applications 729

.....................

Global Access 730

............................................

Uncertain Tax Positions (UTP) 731

...............................

Export Provision to Return 731

Reference Items 732

........

Data Table

. 732

........................

Resize Columns 734

................

Filter Data 734

..............

Sort Data 737

.....................................

Hide and Show Columns 738

..........................

Reorder Columns 739

........................

Group Columns 739

....................................

State and Jurisdiction Codes 740

....................

ISO Currency Codes

ISO Country Codes 741

.......................

. 746

......................

Default Payable Rollup Codes

Fiscal Period Codes 750

.......................................

Default Payable Transaction Types

. 751

..............................................

Permission Component Types

. 751

.......................................

. 754

................................

Component Rollup Codes - Deferred

Access Component Types 755

...................................................

Component Rollup Codes - Effective Rate

. 755

...........................................................

. 756

.........................................................

Component Rollup Codes - Trial Balance 756

..........

Query Filters 757

......................

Dataset Parameters

System Parameters 758

.......................

Unit Dataset Parameters

. 765

..............................

. 772


........................................

Unit State Dataset Parameters

. 773

....................

Import Error Messages

Special Characters 774

...........................

Where to Enter Items in Onesource Tax Provision

. 775

.....................................................................

. 776

CONTENTS

777


Getting Started With Tax Provision

ONESOURCE Tax Provision separates the tax provision process into four sections: My Datasets, Review & Edit, Reporting and Administration. Each section presents tasks for creating your Tax Provision. When data entry is complete, you can use the various data you've entered to assemble and store reports in the system.


Use the Release Notes, Quick Reference Cards and Tutorial Videos provided within the Customer Center 15

to start using Tax Provision and become comfortable with the interface.


SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The following system requirements are associated with the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. For further information, contact the support team at 1-877-829-5969, Option 2 or by email: provisiontechsupport@thomsonreuters.com.

Environment

Current Support

Notes

OPERATING SYSTEM

Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows 8.1 Professional (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows 10 Professional (32-bit and 64- bit)

Apple OS X and various Linux systems may also perform adequately, however, they are not fully tested nor guaranteed.

See browser note below.


Windows 2008 R2



Windows 2012 R2


INTERNET BROWSER

Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Internet Explorer 11 with Enterprise Mode or normal Compatibility mode turned on is no longer required or supported.

We recommend using the latest version of Chrome and Firefox.

If attempting to work under a non- Microsoft operating system, we strongly recommend using Chrome.


Mozilla Firefox


Google Chrome


Apple Safari


Microsoft Edge

MOBILE/OTHER

iOS 9 – Chrome, Safari, Firefox Android 5 – Chrome, Firefox

Screen size for iOS iPad - 9.4 inches

Screen size for Android Tab - 9.7 inches

SCREEN RESOLUTION

1024 x 768 or higher

Desktop only

MICROSOFT OFFICE

2007 or later (32-bit and 64-bit)


OPERATING SYSTEMS

Google/Android Apple/IOS Microsoft/Windows



Platform & Support's Customer Center

ONESOURCE SUPPORT SITE

In the ONESOURCE platform, you can use Resources to access Support's Customer Center.


Here you can choose a product tile or View All Products to view a complete list of products. In the product's page, you can enter text to Search the knowledge base and find Alerts, Suggested Articles, Top FAQs, Trending Articles, Release Notes, Guides, Training options, and Support contact information.


IMPORTANT! The first time that you open the ONESOURCE Product Support page, you are required to set up a OnePass Profile to access the content for each product.

Click

in the Global Navigation bar to open the Customer Center page.

Click Resources > Customer Center > For full access, be sure to sign up for a OnePass Account.



To find ONESOURCE Tax Provision's Quick Reference Cards and Tutorial videos, select Support & Learning > ONESOURCE Product Support > Tax Provision > Search > Suggested Articles.


Note: You can also find ONESOURCE Workpapers' Quick Reference Cards and Tutorial videos in Tax Provision's Suggested Articles.



To contact the support team, click Support & Learning > ONESOURCE Product Support > Tax Provision > Contact Us.


Tax Provision Concepts

This section describes the most common basic tasks you will use when working with ONESOURCE Tax Provision. This is an introduction to the Tax Provision terminology and concepts used in ONESOURCE Tax Provision. The provision calculation, the user interface, and concepts are described in detail. These concepts provide the building blocks for the rest of the guide.


Reviewing the following concepts will help you to understand ONESOURCE Tax Provision's features.



Overview of Provision Calculations


ONESOURCE Tax Provision

In ONESOURCE Tax Provision, you enter the lowest level of data available. When you enter the data at the lowest level of detail, you can configure and present data in multiple ways. Additionally, you can use the provision data to calculate estimated payments, extension payments or planning scenarios.


To enter data at the lowest level of detail, select Review & Edit > Data Entry > select a Component and enter data.


Data Entry Components


Data Navigation Bar

Use the data navigation bar to select a Base Dataset, Comparing Dataset, Leadsheet, or Data Entry page to review, compare and enter your data. You can use the data navigation bar buttons to refresh, export, and print the data within the grid.


Data Navigation Bar


Refresh - Export - Print




You can refresh the data in the grid and see the changes made by other users. When reviewing the grid, if a row number is highlighted orange, then refresh the data.

  • Click Refresh to refresh the data in the page.




You can export the data in the grid to Excel to create a pre-defined pivot table.

  • Click Export to create an Excel file with the data in the grid.




To print the data that appears in the grid:

  • Click Print.


Codes

In Administration, administrators can add codes to create and maintain category items. If codes are already established in another application, consider using those codes in ONESOURCE Tax Provision to create a one-to-one relationship with the data in the other application.




Current/Non-Current

For entries that impact the deferred tax accounts, you must designate the Type as either Current or Non- Current.


In Data Entry, for Temporary, NOL Temporary and After Tax Temporary Differences select C - Current or NC

- Non-Current.


Current or Non-Current List


You can filter Deferred balances and NOL balances to view current and non-current balances separately.


Current or Non-Current Type


You can review the temporary difference summary report for the current and non-current balances by asset and liability.


Global Access

Global Access 730 is the web-based data collection tool where remote users enter data. The system can be

set up so the Global Access data also appears in the ONESOURCE Tax Provision system.


Global Access application


Parameters

Administrators can activate parameters in the application making certain functionality, calculations, report

views, and other functionality available. The four types of parameters are System

534 , Dataset

57, Unit

Dataset

106 , and Unit State Dataset

135 .


Administrators activate system parameters in Manage Restricted Features and Manage Configurations.


My Datasets Interface

You can access My Datasets from the Tax Provision navigation bar. Here you will access and set up your datasets and units.



1


Use My Datasets in the Tax Provision navigation bar to access the datasets assigned to you.


2


Use My Datasets for Review to access all datasets available to you, create a custom dataset list, select options from the ribbon, and work with the grid.


3


Use My Datasets for Review ribbon to export a group of datasets, add/remove datasets to My Review List, and customize the grid with filters and column settings.


4


Use the Data Table to access your data, review dataset information, select actions, and select units. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid.


5


Use Actions to open the Review & Edit page, import and export dataset data, run various calculations, and access the Dataset Administration pages related to the dataset.


6


Use Units to see how many units are activated in a dataset and open the Manage Units page.


My Datasets for Review

In My Datasets for Review, you can see every dataset that you have permission to access regardless if they are Read-Only or Locked. These include your non-archived datasets. Use My Datasets for Review to see all datasets available in All Datasets or a specified dataset list in My Review List.


My Datasets for Review


Viewing All Datasets

You can use the All Datasets tab to access all of the datasets that are available to you. The number on the tab shows you how many datasets are assigned to you. All dataset types are available including Interim and Reporting datasets. In All Datasets, you can select datasets to create a review list.



To add datasets to My Review List:

  1. Click the All Datasets tab to see all the datasets assigned to you.


  2. Select for each dataset that you want to add to My Review List.

  3. Click to add the dataset to My Review List.

To remove datasets from My Review List:

  1. Click My Review List to access all datasets assigned to you.


  2. Select for each dataset that you want to remove from My Review List.


  3. Click to remove the selected dataset(s) from My Review List.


    My Review List


    Dataset Actions

    You can use each line of the grid to perform actions for a dataset. In Actions, you can import and export dataset data, run various calculations, and access the Dataset Administration pages related to a dataset.


    You can perform the following Actions in the All Datasets and My Review List grids.

The option Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results will appear in My Datasets > Calculate.


To manually calculate the Flow-Through Factors:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Click Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results.

    The message appears "Are you sure you would like to calculate unit factor results? WARNING: This will erase all existing flow through data before calculating the new results."


    To set up the calculation to Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors:

EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGH.



SeeFlow-Through 620 for more information about transferring data from one unit to another.


Post Ret-To-Prov

Tax returns for the prior year are typically filed in the current year. Once returns have been filed, a true-up must be booked for the difference between what was accrued in the prior year's provision and the actual amount on tax returns. This true-up must be booked in the current year's provision.


See Return to Provision (RTP) Posting 716 for more information about the Post Ret-to-Prov option.


To post Return-to-Provision calculation:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Post Ret-to-Prov.

  3. Choose Dataset (all units), Sub-consolidation or Unit.

  4. Click Run and the data posts to the units.



Setting up Dataset Administration

To set up a dataset's administration:

  1. In My Datasets, select a dataset and then the More button. A list of options for dataset administration appears

  2. Select an option from the list to open that page.


Dataset More Options


Class Groups

In Class Groups, you can create a group with specified classes. For example, you can create a group to include only the Effective Tax Rate classes to filter out Return To Provision classes. Class Groups appear if you select Classes & Subclasses when creating the dataset.


To create Class Groups:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Class Groups, and select the Plus Sign to add a Class Group.

  3. Type the Name for the New Class Group.

  4. Click OK.


Assign Classes

Available Classes are assigned to the Class Groups. You can select one class or multiple classes and then assign to a class group.

  1. In Available Classes, select a Class and then click the arrow to assign the class. The Class then appears in the Assigned Classes list.

  2. To add multiple classes to a class group, press the Ctrl key and then select the classes to assign.

  3. Click the arrow to assign the classes.

  4. Click Save.


Un-Assign Classes

  1. In Assigned Classes, select a Class and then click the arrow to un-assign the class. The Class appears in the Available Classes list.

  2. To un-assign multiple classes from a class group, press the Ctrl key and then select the classes to un-assign.

  3. Click the arrow to un-assign the classes.

  4. Click Save.


Currency Rates

You can populate your currency rates in a specific dataset by using the Currency Rates option. You can select the currency as well as enter the Beginning Deferred FX Rate, Ending Deferred FX Rate, and Weighted Average FX Rate.


You must set up the dataset parameter in order to access the Country Rates option. To activate the Currency Rates option, select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters > Type CurrencyRates for the Parameter Name > Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type > Type Y for the Parameter Value.


To enter data for Currency Rates:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Currency Rates.

  3. Select the Currency.

  4. Type the Beg Deferred FX Rate.

  5. Type the End Deferred FX Rate.

  6. Type the Wghtd Avg FX Rate.


Symbol

Select a Currency Symbol from the list.


Rates

Enter the Beginning Deferred FX, Ending Deferred FX and Weighted Average FX rates.


Copy From Admin

Select Copy from Admin to copy the currency rates set up in My Datasets > More > Currency Rates.


Populate All

Select Populate All to add all default currency rates from in My Datasets > More > Currency Rates.


Notes

93.



Country Rates

You can populate your country rates in a specific dataset by using the Country Rates option. You can select the country as well as enter the Beginning Deferred Rate, Ending Deferred Rate and Current Tax Rate.


You must set up the dataset parameter in order to access the Country Rates option. To activate the Currency Rates option, select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters > Type CountryRates for the Parameter Name > Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type > Type Y for the Parameter Value.


To enter data for Country Rates:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Country Rates.

  3. Select the Country.

  4. Type the Beg Deferred Rate.

  5. Type the End Deferred Rate.

  6. Type the Current Tax Rate.


Code

Select a Country Code from the drop-down list.


Rates

Enter the Beginning Deferred, Ending Deferred, and Current Tax rates.


Copy From Admin

Select Copy from Admin to copy the country rates set up in My Datasets > More > Country Rates.


Populate All

Select Populate All to add all default country rates from My Datasets > More > Country Rates.


Notes:


Dataset Parameters


Dataset Parameters 57 let you enter parameters in order to have additional functionality in the software.


To configure a parameter in Dataset Parameters:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Dataset Parameters.

  3. In Manage Dataset Parameters, type the Parameter Name.

  4. Select Alphanumeric for Parameter Type and type any letter from B through Z for the Parameter Value.

  5. Click Save.


Warning: Parameters are generally set up by an Implementation Manager or with the help of the Support team.



Dataset State Inclusions

In My Datasets, you can set up the State Inclusions for Provision, Interim and Estimated Payments datasets.


To set up the State Inclusions for a dataset:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Dataset State Inclusions.

  3. Select Type, Code, Name and Included for State and Detail.


State Inclusions


Manage Deferred Rollforwards

Administrators can manage Deferred Rollforwards at the System administration and Dataset administration levels. They can set up Tags or Classes & Subclasses to define how adjustments appear in reports. They can create up to 26 Columns for reporting purposes. Unassigned adjustments will appear in the Default column.

You can manage Deferred Rollforwards in Administration or My Datasets. To manage deferred rollforwards in Administration:

  1. Select Administration and then System.

  2. Click Manage Deferred Rollforwards

    470 .


To manage deferred rollforwards in a dataset:

  1. Select My Datasets > More > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.


Note:


Copy From Admin

Deferred rollforward settings in administration are applied to new datasets. Datasets that are copied or rolled over are assigned the settings of the dataset from which they are copied/rolled over. You can reset the dataset deferred rollforward to the Administration settings by clicking Copy From Admin.


Information set up in the Dataset folder is used to generate the Deferred Balances report


277

for the column

break out view, the Deferred Entry Set-up 38 page, and the Rollforward section in the Temporary Difference

Rollforward pages. The Rollforward section is in Data Entry in the Temp diff Tax Basis, Rollforward tab.


Manage Deferred Rollforward Columns

To manage deferred rollforwards in a dataset:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Manage Deferred Rollforwards

    59.

  3. Select Copy From Admin to copy the settings from the System level in Administration. This will overwrite the data for the current dataset.

  4. Click the arrow to move the deferred rollforward columns up and down.


New Deferred Rollforward Columns

To add a Deferred Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Add and then type the name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.

  3. Click OK.


Edit Deferred Column

To edit a Deferred Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Edit and then type the new name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.


Delete Deferred Column

To delete a Deferred Rollforward Column:

  1. Select a Deferred Rollforward Column.

  2. Select Delete and the message appears All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to.

  3. Select the Deferred Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.

  4. Click Cancel to close without deleting the Deferred Rollforward Column.

  5. Click OK to delete.


To Assign Deferred Rollforward Column Value to Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:

  1. Class Code - Name is a list of available classes.

  1. Select a class for the columns: Activity, Deferred, and/or Balance Sheet Only.


Assignment Summary

The Assignment Summary page lists the classes, column, and assignments.


Deferred Rollforward Column Name

The column name assigned to the class.


Class

The class assigned to the deferred rollforward column.


Class Type

There are four types of classes available:


Flow-Through Profiles

By using Flow-Through Profiles, you can set up various components


23 and transfer data from one unit


24 to

another. You use the Flow-Through Profiles option in My Datasets > More to transfer data from one unit to another.


To set up a Flow-Through Profile, first, you create a dataset with classes. Flow-Through Profiles utilize only

datasets with classes. If you set up Flow-Through in datasets with tags, that functionality did not change.


General

If you have a dataset set up to use classes, you can set up a Flow-Through Profile.


To create a Flow-Through Profile:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Flow-Through Profiles. If you don't have access to Flow-Through Profiles, you may not have a valid license.

    See the Administration > System > Manage Licenses page.

  3. Select the plus sign to add a profile and then type the Name in Add Flow-Through Profile. You need to create a unique flow-through profile.


To configure a new Flow-Through Profile:

  1. In the General tab, type the Profile Description to add options to the profile.

  2. For Data Movement:

    1. Select Gross Balances to transfer the following balances:

      • PTBI

      • Permanent Differences

      • Temporary Differences

      • After Tax Adjustments

      • Tax Adjustments


    2. Select Net Adjustments to transfer calculated values.

      • Current Provision

      • Deferred Provision

      • Equity Adjustments


  3. For Jurisdictions:

    1. Click Federal.

    2. Click State to transfer the State only modifications. This option is not available if you select Gross Balances.



      Notes:

      • If Gross Balances is selected, only the Federal data will transfer. The State only modifications will not transfer. Currently, Gross Balances for states are not transferred because the Source units may have different states than the Target units. Also, partnerships have different tax laws to consider for states than federal. You can transfer the federal data to the states. Data that transfers to the states include State NOL's, State Credits, and State Bonus Depreciation.

      • If Net Adjustments is selected, federal and state data will transfer. You can select a State to receive the data.



  4. For Source Classes select classes from a source unit to transfer out.

    1. Click All to select all classes from a source unit.

      • This option includes all new classes created after the Flow-Through Profile is assigned.

    2. Click Selected to select the Source Classes individually.

    3. Click Select All to select all the Source Classes.

    4. Click Unselect All to remove all the selected Source Classes.

    5. Click Flip Selection to remove the selected Source Classes and add the unselected Source Classes.

  5. Select the Target Class to post transferred records data at the target unit.

  6. Select the Elimination Class to post elimination entries at the source unit.

  7. Select Elimination Type from one of the three options.

    1. Select Details for the detailed elimination balances for the Source Unit.

    2. Select Summary by Source for the summary using system component code for the elimination entry at the source unit.

    3. Select Summary by Target for the summary using mapped target component code for the elimination entry at the source unit.


Note:


Selected Components

Based on the selection from the previous Mapping Configurations step, user should see configurable mapping option: ALL, SELECTED, or EXCEPT ALL.


Target Components

The Target Components column lists selected by user target adjustment code from the Mapping Configurations step.


Target Type

The Target Type column lists the target Component type value from the Mapping Configurations step.


Net Adjustments

  1. Select Net Adjustments on the General page to calculate the values for current and deferred taxes for the Flow-Through configurations.

  2. For the jurisdiction value, select the target adjustment code, type and state for each tax affected value to appear on the target unit.


    FEDERAL NET ADJUSTMENTS

    Target Adjustment for Federal Current Taxes


To assign a new Flow-Through Profile to units:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Click Units and then Properties.

  3. Select the Flow-through tab.

  4. Select the Flow-Through Target or Source to assign units:

    1. Target (Source) Unit: add target (Source) active unit from the list.

    2. Profile: Select a Flow-Through Profile.

    3. Factor: Define the percentage allocated to the selected flow-through profile.

    4. Select the Create Auto Elim? option to create an elimination entry at the source unit based on the profile elimination type.

    5. The Profile Comment is an optional field to add comments as needed.

  5. Click Save. The same profile can be assigned to multiple target (source) units.


To configure the Flow-Through data transfer:

  1. Select Administration >System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality.

3. Select Flow Through options to transfer data:

  1. Select Yes for the parameter Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors.

    This option allows the application to transfer data as information is saved in the source unit component.

  2. Select Yes for the parameter “ Display the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item" to calculate the flow-through manually.


See Calculate Flow-Through Factor 49 for more information about calculating the Flow-Through Factor.


Unit Properties


To review the Flow-Through data transfer history:

  1. In Review & Edit select the Base Dataset.

  2. Select the component (Permanent Difference, Temporary Difference, etc.) for review.

  3. Click the Data Source field. (You can also review by filtering the Target/Elimination Classes.)

  4. Select the Flow-Through Source page to review the source data.

  5. Right click on the page and then select Export to Excel.


When a dataset is copied you can select the option to omit flow-through records from the source dataset. To eliminate Flow-Through data from the Source dataset:

  1. In My Datasets select the Source Dataset.

  2. Select More and then Dataset Parameters.

  3. Type EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGHCLASSES for the Parameter Name.

  4. Type Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.

  5. Type 1 for the Parameter Value.

  1. Click Save.

  2. Copy the Source dataset to create a new dataset from the source dataset.


    Net Adjustments

    When you select Net Adjustments, the calculated values are transferred. By selecting the appropriate Components, you can define current taxes as deferred taxes. For the State, you can select a state for the state taxes.


    Target Adjustment for Federal Current Taxes:


NEW JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE (DATASET LEVEL)

To create a Journal Entry Profile:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Journal Entry Profiles.

  3. Select the plus sigh to add a profile and then type the Code, Name and Description.


NEW JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE (UNIT LEVEL)

To create a Unit Journal Entry Line:

  1. Select My Datasets and then Units for a dataset.

  2. Select More and then Journal Entry Profiles.

  3. Click Create New.

  4. Select the JE Type and then JE Code.

  5. Select the JE Summary and type the Description.

  6. Select the Debit GL Account and Credit GL Account.

  7. Type the Cost Center and Department Code, if needed.


Warning: If you create a Journal Entry at the Unit level, journal entries are deleted. You will receive a message to confirm the deletion of journal entries.



EDIT JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE

To edit a Journal Entry Profile:

  1. Type the new Name and then the new Description.


COPY JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE

To copy a Journal Entry Profile:

  1. Select Journal Entry Profile.

  2. Select Copy and then type the New Code(required).

  3. Type the new Name for Edit Journal Entry Profile and then Description.

  4. Click OK.


DELETE JOURNAL ENTRY PROFILE

To delete a Journal Entry Profile:

  1. Select Delete.

  2. Click Cancel to close without deleting the journal entry profile.

  3. Click OK to delete.


PROFILE DEFINITION

To set up the Profile Definition:

  1. Select the Journal Entry Profile.

  2. To ensure you selected the correct journal entry profile, review the Code, Name, and Description.

  3. For Datasets with classes:

    1. Click Include All Classes to include all classes in the journal entry profile.

    2. This function is for datasets created with classes.

    3. This option includes all new classes.

    4. To select all Source classes, select the box on the header row.

    5. To define specific source classes, click the box next to the selected class.

    6. You can sort and filter the Source Class list by Type, Code, or Class Name.

  4. To select Journal Entry Codes, click Include All Classes to remove the check mark.

    1. To select all Journal Entry Codes, select the box in the header row and then select each Journal Entry Code.

    2. If you need to exclude a few Journal Entry Codes, select all the Journal Entry Codes and then select each Journal Entry Code, to remove the check mark.

  5. Click Save.


Note: If using a Tag dataset, the Source Classes will not appear.



JOURNAL LINES

To create new Journal Lines:

  1. Click Create New.

  2. Click JE Type.

  3. Click JE Code.

  4. Click JE Summary.

  5. Type Name.

  6. Select the Debit and Credit Account.

  7. Click Save.

  8. Select the Flex 1-9 and type notes.


To change the Flex field labels:

  1. Select Administration.

  2. Select System.

  3. Select Manage Configurations.

  4. Select Advanced Functionality and then Journal Entries.

  5. Type the new label name for Journal Entry Supplemental Field #1-9.

  6. Click Save.


Note: To complete the setup for the Journal Entry lines, configure both the Tax and Book entries.



TAX CALCULATIONS

To set up the Tax Calculations (These steps configure the Tax journal entries):

  1. Click Create New.

  2. Click Tax Calc Filter to filter the list of tax calculations.

  3. Click Tax Calculation to select the tax calculation.

  4. Select Component to separately state a code with a tax calculation in the Difference column.

  5. Type the Factor.

  6. Click Save.


To delete the tax calculations:

  1. Select the Tax Calculation from the Tax Calculations list.

  2. Click Delete.

  3. Click Delete All to delete all the Tax Calculations from the list.


GL SOURCES

To set up the General Ledger Sources (These steps configure the Book journal entries):

  1. Click Create New.

  2. Click GL Account to select the GL Account.

  3. Type the Factor.

  4. Click Save.


To delete the General Ledger Sources:

  1. Select the GL Account from the GL Account list.

  2. Click Delete.

  3. Click Delete All to delete all the Tax Calculations from the list.


ASSIGNED UNITS

You assign a Journal Entry Profile to Available Unit(s). A unit can be assigned to multiple journal entry profiles.

To assign a Journal Entry Profile to selected unit(s):

  1. In the Available Units list, select the Unit(s).

  2. Click the Right Arrow to assign the units to the Assigned Units list.

  3. Click Save.


    Warning: Journal Entry configurations previously set up at the unit level


    101

    will be permanently removed.



  4. To change the values for a selected unit:

  1. Select the Unit from the Assigned Units list.

  2. Click the Add Unit Flex Field Overrides icon.

  3. Type the new value in the flex field.

  4. Click Save to update the unit with the new value.

  5. Click Cancel to leave the page without saving changes.

  6. To reset all values, click Clear All Fields.



Notes:

supplemental information in Manage Configurations, within the Journal Entry tab

496 .



Manage NOL Rollforwards

Administrators can manage Deferred Rollforwards at the System administration and Dataset administration levels. They can set up Tags or Classes & Subclasses to define how adjustments appear in reports. They can create up to 26 Columns for reporting purposes. Unassigned will appear in the Default column.


Dataset Classes

SETTINGS

At the Dataset level, you can Add, Edit, and Delete NOL rollforward columns by class. You can also move the NOL rollforward columns Up and Down in the list.


COPY FROM ADMIN

NOL rollforward settings in administration are applied to new datasets. Datasets that are copied or rolled over are assigned the settings of the dataset from which they are copied/rolled over. You can reset the dataset NOL rollforward to the "Administration" settings by clicking Copy From Admin.


Information set up in the Dataset folder is used to generate the Deferred Balances report


277

for the column

break out view, the Deferred Entry Set-up 38 page, and the Rollforward section in the Temporary Difference

pages. The rollforward section is in Data Entry in the Temp diff Tax Basis, Rollforward tab.


MANAGE NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS:

To manage NOL rollforwards in a dataset:

  1. In My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select NOL Rollforwards.

  3. Select Copy From Admin to copy the settings from the System level in Administration. This will overwrite the data for the current dataset.

  4. Click the arrow to move the NOL rollforward columns up and down.


NEW NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS:

To add a NOL Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Add and then type the name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.

  3. Click OK.


EDIT NOL COLUMN:

To edit a NOL Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Edit and then type the new name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.

  3. Click OK.


DELETE NOL COLUMN:

To delete a NOL Rollforward Column:

  1. Select a NOL Rollforward Column.

  2. Select Delete and the message appears, All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to.

  3. Select the NOL Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.

  4. Click Cancel to close without deleting the NOL Rollforward Column.

  5. Click OK to delete.


    To Assign NOL Rollforward Column Value to Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:


DATA ENTRY COLUMN

The type defined for the adjustment.


Dataset Tags

You can manage NOL Rollforwards for dataset classes in My Datasets. To manage NOL rollforwards in Administration:

  1. Select Administration and then System.

  2. Click Manage NOL Rollforwards

    470.


To manage NOL rollforwards in a dataset:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Manage NOL Rollforwards.


Notes:


Payable Settings

By using Payable Settings, you can assign Transaction Types to a Custom Tab for the Payable Summary option. You use the Payable Summary option in My Datasets > More to assign transaction types. You can assign transaction types to limit the number of transaction types available in the Custom Tab.


To view the Payable Settings option in the More drop-down list, you will import the system parameter, SHOW_PAYABLE_SETTINGS, to activate it.


To activate the Payable Settings system parameter:

  1. In the Categories import spreadsheet, select the #XXX worksheet.

  2. Type SHOW_PAYABLE_SETTINGS for parameter and then 1 for the parameter value.

  3. In Administration, select Import Categories.


To assign a Transaction Type to a Custom Tab:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Click Payable Settings.

  3. Select a Transaction Type from the drop-down list.

  4. Select a Custom Tab from the drop-down list.

  5. Click Save.


    Payable Settings


    State Rates

    You can populate your state rates in a specific dataset. You use the State Rates option in My Datasets > More to work with the state rates. You will select the state then enter the Beginning Deferred Rate, Ending Deferred Rate and State Tax Rate. You must set up the dataset parameter in order to access the State Rates option in the More drop-down list.


    To activate the parameter for the State Rates option select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters > Type StateRates for the Parameter Name > select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type > Type Y for the Parameter Value.


    COPY FROM ADMIN


To enter data the State Rates:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select State Rates.

  3. Select the State.

  4. Select a State from the State drop-down list.

  5. Type the Beg Deferred Rate.

  6. Type the End Deferred Rate.

  7. Type the State Tax Rate.


    Mass Update Rates 91 lets you apply Tax and Currency Rates on a universal basis to datasets.


    See Override Option 93 for more information about overriding rates.


    Tax Basis Mapping

    You can layer Temporary Differences to create the Tax Basis Balance sheet. You use the Tax Basis Mapping option in My Datasets > More to create the mappings.


    Component Types available: After Tax Temporary Differences, NOL Temporary Differences, Permanent Differences, Temporary Differences.



To activate the functionality to post the Non Cash tax adjustment code(s) NC_RTP, NC_ATR, NC_OTHER to the payable, select Post NC_ to payable with system mapping.

  1. Select the tax adjustments for payable mapping.

    You will find the Tax Adjustment Payable Mappings are available at the Federal and State tax adjustment levels.

  2. Select the Code-Description, Tax Adj. Tag or Class & Subclass, Fiscal Year, Txn Type, Txn Bucket, and Payable Tag or Payable Class & Subclass.

4. Select the Code-Description.


The Payable Tag and Classes determine how the adjustment will be sorted within the Payable. You can configure the settings on a NC_ basis if you want to set up a parameter.


Payable Summary Entry

By using the Payable Summary Entry option, you can enter the payable transactions for all units and jurisdictions in one list.


Warning: If the tax adjustments are also mapped in Tax Adjustment Payable Mapping is posted twice.

83, the adjustment



You must activate system parameters to access the payable pages.


NAME CUSTOM TABS

To can create Custom Tabs:

  1. Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality >

    Payable.

  2. Select the Number of Tabs to display (maximum 2).

  3. Type the Custom Tab Name 1. Default value: Payable 1.

  4. Type the Custom Tab Name 2. Default value: Payable 2.


ENABLE RECLASS TAB

To Enable the Reclass Tab page:

  1. Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality >

Payable.

3. Click Enable Reclass Tab.


RECLASS DATA ENTRY

To enter Reclass Data Entry transactions for Reclass:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Payable Summary Entry.

  3. Select the Unit and then Fiscal Year.

  4. Select the Jurisdiction and then Rollup.

  5. Select the Txn Type (Transaction Type) and then Txn Bucket (Transaction Bucket).

  6. Select Class and then Subclass.

  7. Type the Amount and then Date.

  8. Select the FX Rate and then Description.

  9. Click Save.


PAYABLE SUMMARY ENTRY (CUSTOM TAB 1 & 2)

To enter Payable Summary Entry transactions:

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Payable Summary Entry.

  3. Select the Unit and then Fiscal Year.

  4. Select the Jurisdiction and then Rollup.

  5. Select the Txn Type (Transaction Type) and then Txn Bucket (Transaction Bucket).

  6. Select Class and then Subclass.

  7. Type the Amount and then Date.

  8. Select the FX Rate and then Description.

  9. Click Save.


    Note:



Lock/Unlock Unit

You can review the results of the Unit Summary report in the Lock/Unlock Unit option. You can Lock/Unlock units within a dataset. You can view the Unit Code, Name, Pre-Tax, Total Tax, ETR, Note, Locked, Primary Contact, Last Modified, and Date.


You can Export the data from the Lock/Unlock Units page. However, you cannot Import data into this page.


By default, the filter is turned on, and only the units that are assigned to the Primary Contact appear. The option filters the unit list using the Primary Contact name. Apply and Clear filters to view specific information in the list.


To lock units in a dataset:

  1. In My Datasets, select More.

  2. Select Lock/Unlock Unit.

  3. Click Locked for each Unit Code.

3. Click Save.


To lock all units in a dataset:

  1. Click Locked in the column header.

  2. Click OK to proceed or Cancel to close without locking all units.


To unlock units in a dataset:

  1. Click Locked in the Locked column to remove the option.

  2. Click Save.


GAAP to STAT Dataset Parameters

DATASET PARAMETER CHANGE FOR RTP GAAP/STAT POSTING


You can change the tags for the permanent, temporary, GAAP RTP tag and RTP tag. The tags change in the provision dataset designated as the return dataset (RTP Return) in Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets Dataset Relations.


To change the tags for the permanent, temporary, GAAP RTP, and RTP :

  1. Select My Datasets and then More.

  2. Select Dataset Parameters and then Type the Parameter Name.

    List of Parameter Names:

    1. GAAPADJTAG

    2. STATADJTAG

    3. GAAPRTPTAG

    4. RTPTAG


      1. Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.

      2. Type the Tag Letter for the Parameter Value.

        • Parameter Value is the letter you want to designate as the tag letter.


Jurisdiction Management

An Administrator can configure the percentage of estimated liability in the quarters, the extension payment, and the minimum taxes that may be required.



Creating Mass Update Rates

This section describes the process of creating Mass Update Rates


SET UP MASS UPDATE RATES

To set up the Mass Update Rates:

  1. Select Administration and then System.

  2. Select Manage Countries and type the Countries Rates.

  3. Select Manage Currencies and type the Currencies Rates.


    91 .

  4. Select Manage States, then States and type the States Rates.


MASS UPDATE RATE PARAMETERS

To set up the Mass Update Rate Parameters:

  1. In the My Datasets, select a Provision dataset.

  2. Select More and then Dataset Parameters.

    1. Type the Parameter Name.

      List of Parameter Names:

      1. CountryRates

      2. CurrencyRates

      3. StateRates

    2. Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.

    3. Type Y for the Parameter Value.


RATE POPULATION

There are two ways to initially complete the State, Country, and Currency with Mass Update Rates:


  1. The rates are transferred from Administration to populate the lists:

    1. In My Datasets, select a Provision dataset.

    2. Select More and then select Currency Rates, Country Rates or State Rates.

    3. Click Populate All to transfer all rates.


  2. The alternative method is to add individual rates at the Dataset level:

    1. In the My Datasets, select the Provision dataset.

    2. Select More and then select Currency Rates, Country Rates or State Rates.

    3. Click Add and then select a code from the list.

    4. Click Save. The application automatically transfers the rates to the units for this Symbol/Code along with the existing Mass Update Rates.


To refresh the Dataset level rates with the updated rates in the Administration area, click Copy From Admin.


Override Option

When you create a new unit, it uses the rates set at the dataset level as the default. Override Rate options

in Unit

107 and State

132 Details are now Read/Write. The default for the Override Rate options is unselected.

When the Override Rate check box is selected, the rate becomes the rate at the Unit level, not for the entire dataset.


There are three views of the Override functionality in the Unit and State Details screens.



For the tag marked Tag Restricted, all buttons are inactive. In addition, once a tag is restricted, the Source field only displays a single letter code (M for example). It no longer displays the Source code's description. However, Administrators can still view the entire entry (M - Manual for example) in the Source field.


Using the RestrictTA Parameter

The RestrictTA parameter controls which tax adjustment codes Read/Write users can modify and limits the entries they can create. The Parameter Value can be the first character, a combination of the first few characters, or the entire code.


Note: Read/write users can edit the entry (the adjustment can be changed) and deleted (the Delete button is active). The tax adjustment code is marked Restricted and all buttons are inactive.



Units

In My Datasets, you can see how many units are active or inactive for a dataset in the Units column. When you activate units for a dataset, the number of units activated appears in the units column. The dataset's Status changes from Inactive to Active. If no units are activated in a dataset, the dataset has an Inactive Status.


To access the Manage Units :

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. Click the Units button for a dataset and the Manage Units page opens giving you access to all units in the system.


Units


Manage Units Interface

You can access Manage Units from the My Datasets grid. Here you will access and set up your units.



1


Use the back button to go to My Datasets page.


2


Use Manage Units to see the dataset name, year, period, type and option, along with the number of Active/Inactive Units within the dataset.


3


Use the Manage Units ribbon to Activate All Units, Export All Units, and the Data Table buttons to change how the data appears in the Data Table.


4


Use the Data Table to review and group unit information, select actions, activate a unit, and manage jurisdictions. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid.


5


Use Actions to lock/unlock units and select More for access to the Unit Administration pages related to the unit.


Manage Units

In Manage Units, you can Activate All Units, and Export All Units in the grid. For each unit, you can use each line of the grid to Lock/Unlock the unit, perform Unit Dataset Administration tasks. You can also access the Jurisdictions/States page to activate and then edit them. To change the view of the grid, you can filter, sort, and search as well as Show/Hide columns in the grid.


You can use use the options to edit, configure and manage your units and jurisdictions within the dataset.


107


113


Setting up Unit Administration

To set up a unit's administration:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.

  4. Select an option from the list to open that page.


Units More Options


Unit Journal Entries

JOURNAL ENTRY DETAILS

In Manage Units, you can add Journal entries for Provision and Interim datasets.


See Journal Entry Profiles 69 for more information about setting up your Journal Entries.


Note: When a unit is assigned to a Journal Entry Profile, the Journal Entry page no longer appears Manage Units. You will receive a message that there is already a Journal Entry Profile associated with this unit.




Unit Journal Entries


To create Journal Entries 673 at the unit level:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.

  4. Select Journal Entry Profiles.

  5. Select Add.

  6. Select the JE Type.

  7. Select the JE Code.

  8. Select the JE Summary.

  9. Type the Name.

  10. Type the Description.

  11. Select the Debit GL Account and then the Credit GL Account.

  12. Type Supplemental Information.

  13. To rename the Flex Field Labels:


  1. Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries.

  2. Type the label name in the "Journal Entry Supplemental Field Name #1-9."

  3. The entries are immediately saved.


Warning: Journal Entry configurations previously set up at the "unit level" within the Federal and State folders will be permanently removed.



TAX CALCULATIONS

To set up the Tax Calculations (These steps configure the Tax journal entries):

  1. Click Add.

  2. Click Tax Calc Filter to filter the list of tax calculations.

  3. Click Tax Calculation to select the tax calculation.

  4. Select Component to separately state a code with a tax calculation in the Difference column.

  5. Type the Factor.

  6. Click the plus sign to add the calculation.


To delete a Tax Calculation:

  1. Select a Tax Calculation.

  2. Click X.


GL SOURCES

To set up the General Ledger Sources (These steps configure the Book journal entries):

  1. Click Add.

  2. Select the JE Type Federal or State.

  3. Type the JE Code. The code entered is associated with the journal entry.

  4. Select the JE Summary.

  5. Type the Description.

  6. Click the GL Sources tab.

  7. Select the GL Account.

  8. Type the Factor.


To delete the General Ledger Sources:

  1. Select the GL Account.

  2. Click X.

  3. Click Delete All to delete all of the Tax Calculations from the list.


To delete Journal Entries:

  1. Select the Journal Entry Code Name.

  2. Click Delete.


    To delete all of the Journal Entries, you must activate the Delete All option.


Note: To complete the setup for the Journal Entry lines, select the Tax Calculation tab to configure Tax entries and the GL Sources tab to configure the Book entries.



TAXES PER BOOK

Taxes Per Book are entered on the Taxes Per book page. The balances entered are used for Journal entry reports and compare the balances entered to the provision calculations.


To enter in taxes per book for a Provision dataset:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  1. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  2. In Manage Units, click the More button and then click Other.

  1. Click the Taxes Per Book.

  2. Type the balances.


    To import taxes per book complete the appropriate fields on the #U# Unit sheet in the Import numbers template.


    Unit Dataset Parameters

    In Manage Units, you can set up the Unit Dataset Parameters for Provision, Interim and Estimated Payments datasets. Administrators use Unit dataset parameters to change how data is treated or represented within a unit.



Unit Dataset Parameters


You can enter Unit Dataset Parameters

  1. Select My Datasets.

    772 to activate additional options in the system.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, click the More button and select Unit Dataset Parameters.

  4. Type the Parameter Key, Parameter Type and Parameter Value.

  5. Click Save.


Warning: Parameters are generally set up by an Implementation Manager or with the help of the Support team.



Unit Rates

In the Unit Rates page, you can view and set up the rates needed for calculations. You can set up the PTBI Data Entry Policy, Weighted Average FX Rate, Statutory Tax Rates, FX Rates, and Deferred Provision Only Adjustment.


To set up a unit's rates:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, select the More drop-down list.

  4. Click Rates.


    Unit Rates


    Deactivate a Unit

    In the Rates page, you can use the Deactivate Unit button to remove the unit record from the dataset by deactivating the unit.


    Warning:



PTBI Policies

PRE-TAX BOOK INCOME (REPORT)

You can select the PTBI Data Entry Policy to calculate data for the report. The default PTBI Data Entry Policy is Enter Local, FX; Calc USD.


PTBI DATA ENTRY POLICY

There are five options for entering Pre-Tax Book Income, which are determined by the data entry policy. From

the PTBI Data Entry Policy drop-down list, select the desired PTBI method

108.


To change the PTBI Policy:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.

  4. Select Rates.

  5. Click Change.


Select one of the following policies to calculate data for reporting:

  1. Enter USD, FX and Calc Local.

  2. Enter Local, USD and Calc FX.

  3. Enter Local, USD and FX.

  4. Enter Local, USD, FX and Calc Rounding.



    Policy

    Local Currency PBT

    Reporting Currency PBT

    FX Rate

    Rounding

    Enter Local, FX and Calc USD


    Entered


    Calculated


    Entered


    N/A

    Enter USD, FX and Calc Local

    Calculated

    Entered

    Entered

    N/A

    Enter Local, USD and Calc FX

    Entered

    Entered

    Calculated

    N/A

    Enter Local, USD and FX

    Entered

    Entered

    Entered

    N/A

    Enter Local, USD, FX and Calc Rounding


    Entered


    Entered


    Entered


    Calculated


    If Enter Local, USD and Calc FX policy is selected and the Local PTBI equals zero:


117


Unit Other


Automation

You can set up the Automation policies by using the Other option. Automation is available for Provision, Estimated Payments and Interim datasets.


TO SET UP THE AUTOMATION FOR A DATASET:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.

  4. Click Other.

  5. Select the Automation tab.

  6. Click Valuation Allowance Rates to activate the Valuation Allowance Automation.

  7. Click NOL to activate the NOL Automation.

  8. Click AMT to activate the AMT Automation.


726


Taxes Per Book

You can set up the Taxes Per Book by using the Other option. Taxes Per Book is available for Provision and

Interim datasets. The accounts can be used for Journal Entry 673 reports by comparing the balances and the

provision calculations to arrive at the appropriate journal entries required to be posted for the period.


To set up the taxes per book for a dataset:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.

  4. Click Other.

  5. Select the Taxes Per Book tab.


    Type the amount for each field.


To import taxes per book information, complete the appropriate fields on the #U# Unit sheet in the Import

Numbers 556 template.


Miscellaneous

You can set up the Additional CTA (Reporting), Unit Dataset Extensions, Global Access Flags, YTD PTBI, YTD Accrual Factors, Alternate Unit/Entity ID Code by using the Other option, Miscellaneous tab.

Miscellaneous is available in the Provision and Interim datasets. Custom options appear in this page. For example, you can create data entry fields for Liability Balances and Unit Dataset Extensions (UserNum9).


To set up the unit dataset extensions for a dataset:

  1. Select My Datasets.

  2. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

  3. In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.

  4. Click Other.

  5. Select the Miscellaneous tab.


Estimated Payments

You will enter estimated payment information in an Estimated Payments dataset, only. The data you enter is added to the provision when calculating estimated payments.


To enter items for estimated payments:

  1. Select My Datasets.

    1. For a dataset, click the Units button and the Manage Units page opens.

    2. In Manage Units, click the More button and a list of options for the unit administration appears.

    3. Click Other.

  2. Select Estimated Payments.


To import information to Estimated Payments, complete the appropriate fields on the #U# Unit sheet in the Import Numbers template.


OTHER INCOME TAX (ADDITIVE TO CASH PROVISION)

Adds an additional amount to the provision liability in the estimated payments calculation.


CALCULATED INCOME TAX PYMT OVERRIDE

Overwrites the calculated estimated payments.


FRANCHISE PAYMENTS

Additional amount of Franchise Tax that to include with the provision liability in the estimated payments calculation.


INCLUDE FOR ESTIMATED PAYMENT CALC?

Includes or excludes the unit for the estimated payments calculation.


Unit Properties

In the Unit Properties page, you can view and set up the following properties for a unit.


124


Unit Properties


General Information

In the General tab, you can view the Unit Code, Unit Name, Unit Type, Country Name, and Country Symbol (you entered this information when adding the dataset to the system). Here, you can enter a Description, and select a Primary Contact, Filing Unit for the Unit.


Other options available include: Activate the Transfer Tab, Deactivate a Unit from the Target Dataset during Rollover, view the Closed Date, and enter Comments.


  1. If desired, enter a Description for for the unit.

    You can enter a description at the dataset level. If you change the description in the Unit System Level or within the import template, this description remains unchanged. The maximum characters is 60, with special characters and numbers allowed.

  2. Select a Primary Contact Name from the drop-down list.

  3. Select the Filing Unit from the drop-down list.

    The system considers the Filing Unit as the Parent unit and lets you group units. When you group units with a Parent unit, the system considers them as Child units. Currently, the application does not allow multiple tiered filing units. The system calculates all units within a Filing Unit as a single unit when applying the automated NOL, AMT, and netting of assets and liabilities.

  4. Click Yes to Activate the Transfer Tab.

  5. Click Yes to Deactivate a Unit from the Target Dataset during Rollover.

  6. Select a Deactivate Unit to make the unit inactive.


General tab


Assigned Users

In the Assigned Users tab, you can review the Primary Contact, User ID, User Name, and Role for the unit selected in My Datasets.


Assigned Users tab


Flow-Through

In the Flow-Through tab, you can set up the Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources. Flow-Through is used to transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another. It is useful for partnerships. To set up the Flow-Through functionality select My Datasets > Units > More > Properties.


Flow-Through tab


Flow-Through Targets

To define the Flow Through Targets and Flow Through Sources:

  1. In Manage Units, for a unit select the More drop-down list.

  2. Select Properties for a unit and that unit becomes the Source/Target unit.

  3. Select the Flow-Through tab. The Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources tabs appear with the Unit Code/Description for the Source and Target unit.


For the Flow Through Targets:

You can Add, Delete, Import, and Export the Flow-Through Target information.

  1. From the Target Unit drop-down list, select a Unit.

  2. From the Profile drop-down list, select a profile.

  3. For Factor, double-click the cell and type the factor.

  4. Click Create Auto Elim? to create an elimination.

  5. Type a Profile Comment, if desired.


Flow-Through Target


Flow-Through Sources

To define the Flow Through Targets and Flow Through Sources:

  1. In Manage Units, for a unit select the More drop-down list.

  2. Select Properties for a unit and that unit becomes the Source/Target unit.

  3. Select the Flow-Through tab. The Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources tabs appear with the Unit Code/Description for the Source and Target unit.


For the Flow Through Sources:

You can Add, Delete, Import, and Export the Flow-Through Source information.

  1. From the Source Unit drop-down list, select a Unit.

  2. From the Profile drop-down list, select a profile.

  3. For Factor, double-click the cell and type the factor.

  4. Click Create Auto Elim? to create an elimination.

  5. Type a Profile Comment, if desired.


Flow-Through Sources


Transfers

A Unit Transfer is the transfer of a partial or full balance from one unit to another. To set up the unit transfer use the Transfer Wizard. You can transfer units that have the same Federal Ending Deferred rate and the same Ending Deferred FX rate. You may need to make an adjustment to account for any State rate differences that occur during the unit transfer.


To transfer deferred/payable balances from one unit to another:

  1. In Manage Units, for a unit select the More drop-down list.

  2. Select Properties for a unit.

  3. In the General tab, click Yes to Activate the Transfer Tab.

  4. Select the Transfers tab and the Data Transfer Summary page opens.

  5. Click Transfer Wizard to open the Transfer Unit Data page.


TRANSFER UNIT DATA

In the Transfer Unit Data page, the Source Unit is the unit where you selected More > Properties.

  1. Select Properties for a unit and that unit becomes the Source/Target unit.

  1. Select the Target Unit from the drop-down list.

  2. For Transfer Data:

    1. Select All Data at 100%.

    2. Select Percentage and then type a percentage.

    3. Select Custom to transfer an amount of a particular adjustment.

  3. For Transfer Items:

    1. Select Temporary to transfer the deferred balances.

    2. Select Payable to transfer the payable balances.

    3. Select Temporary & Payable to transfer deferred and payable balances.

  4. Click Next.

  5. For Transfer Unit Data:

    1. You can select the following Temporary Diffs Components to Transfer.

      1. Click Federal Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.

      2. Click Federal Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.

      3. Click Federal After Tax Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.

      4. Click Federal After Tax Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.

      5. Click Federal NOL Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.

    2. You can select the following Payable Components to Transfer.

      1. Click Federal Payable.

      2. Click State Payable.

  6. Click Next.


TRANSFER CLASSES -TEMPORARY DIFFERENCES

  1. To set up the Classes to transfer with temporary differences, you will select classes for the Temporary Differences. The Classes are set up in Administration within Manage Options. You can select Classes/Subclasses to review the classes set up for Transfers.

    1. Select Transfer Out Current Class.

    2. Select Transfer Out Non-Current Class.

    3. Select Transfer In Current Class.

    4. Select Transfer in Non-Current Class.

  2. Type Notes, if desired.

  3. Click Yes to Review Transfer Payable.

  4. Click Next.


TRANSFER CLASSES - PAYABLE

  1. To set up the Classes to transfer with payable balances, you will select classes for the Payable Balances. The Classes are set up in Administration within the Manage Options. You can select Classes/Subclasses to review the classes set up for Transfers.

    1. Select Transfer Out Class.

    2. Select Transfer Out Transaction Type.

    3. Select Transfer Out Transaction Bucket.

    4. Select Transfer In Class.

    5. Select Transfer In Transaction Type.

    6. Select Transfer In Transaction Bucket.

  2. Type Notes, if desired.

  3. Click Yes to Review Transfer Payable data.

  4. Click Next.


REVIEW TRANSFER

  1. If you selected Yes to Review Transfer for Temp Diffs and Payable data, the Next pages lets you review the balances for each transfer. If no balances are transferred the Total Selected line will equal zero.

    1. Review the Ending Balance.

      • Balance from the Source Unit.

    2. Review the Transfer Amount.

      • Balance to Transfer.

  2. Review the Total Selected.

  3. Click Next.

  4. For the Final Review, click By checking this box, you agree to transfer selected data immediately.

  5. Click Save.


REVIEW DATA TRANSFER SUMMARY

The data transfer information appears on the Jobs page.


Add Jurisdictions



1


to add all jurisdictions in the system.

In the header row for Add Jurisdictions, click

2 Click to add a State in the system.



3


to add a Province in the system.

Click

4 Click to add All Other in the system.



5


Manage States 436 for more information about creating new jurisdictions for the Jurisdictions list.

to add a City in the system.

Click

See


Edit Jurisdictions

You can edit the jurisdiction/state information in the Activated Jurisdictions list. Click Edit for a specific jurisdiction and that jurisdiction page opens.


You can update the following items for each jurisdiction.

Attachments.


Manage Attachments


Unit State Dataset Parameters

Administrators can access unit state dataset parameters


135 to control some unit level features in My

Datasets > Units > Jurisdictions > Edit > Unit State Dataset Parameters. Administrators use unit state dataset parameters to change how data is treated or represented within a jurisdiction for a unit/dataset. Unit State Dataset Parameters let you add parameters and then additional functionality is available in the system.


Pre-established unit dataset parameters


772

can be added, modified, or deleted. When adding or modifying

parameters, use care, as they can potentially change calculations across all the units in a dataset. Parameters are pre-defined and are case-sensitive. The Key Type and Value have specific designations for each parameter. Deleting parameters is not recommended because they may be required for the system to function properly. It is recommended that you de-activate a parameter, rather than deleting it.


To import a new unit state dataset parameter, complete the appropriate fields on the #USDSP# USDS Params sheet in the Import Numbers template. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.


Unit State Dataset Parameters


To add parameters in Unit State Dataset Parameters:

  1. Select My Datasets and then Units

  2. For a unit, select Fed/State in the Jurisdictions column.

  3. In Activated Jurisdictions, click Unit State Dataset Parameters.

  4. Type the Parameter Key, Parameter Type, and then Parameter Value.

  5. Click Save.


Manage Unit State Dataset Parameters


Review & Edit

In the Review & Edit page, first you select the Base Dataset that has the data that you want to work with. Then, you can navigate through your data by selecting a Comparing Dataset, Lead Sheet or Data Entry component. This page lets you review your data in various ways without having to create a report to check the impact of a data entry.


Upon opening the Review & Edit page, you can see a Summary view of your data. By default, the system

populates the Base Dataset with the first dataset in your Review List 45 . Optionally, you can select

for a dataset in My Datasets 42, making that dataset's data available to review. To review other

dataset's data, you can select a dataset in the Base Dataset drop-down list. The Base Dataset list is populated with datasets that reside in your Review List.


There are four views in which you can review your data.


Comparing Datasets


Leadsheets

In Review & Edit, you can use Lead Sheets to review your balances for Total Tax Provision (Benefit), Deferred Tax Asset ( Liability) or (Payable) Receivable. There are three different Lead Sheets: Provision, Deferred, and Payable. In the Lead Sheet grid, you can review the line item name and it's value.


To review the Lead Sheet data for your Units and Sub-Consolidations.

  1. Select a Base Dataset to see all Units and Sub-Consolidations that are active for that dataset.

  2. Select a Lead Sheet from the drop-down list.


DEFERRED LEAD SHEET

The Deferred Lead Sheet shows a summary of deferred's for the Federal + State + FBOS. In the unit's column, you can review the Tax Effected values for the deferred entries.


PAYABLE

The Payable Lead Sheet shows a summary of Payables. The Payables Leadsheet requires some configuration. The activity uses the Txn Types (CPROV - Payable Auto Posting) set up for the payable. The system determines the BBAL- Beginning Balance, Ending Balance, and CTA balance.


Comparing Lead Sheet Data

COMPARING LEAD SHEETS

When comparing values in the Summary page, you can select a hyperlink for a Lead Sheet to review that lead sheets data. The system will retain the comparing values for that lead sheet to review. Additionally, in the Lead Sheet, you can use the unit drop-down list to select another unit to review.


Comparing Lead Sheet - Change Unit/Sub-Consolidation


Comparing Values - Provision Lead Sheet


Comparing Values - Deferred Lead Sheet


Comparing Values - Payable Lead Sheet


Data Entry

In Review and Edit


136, you will find the data entry functionality for all jurisdictions (Federal, State, Province,

All Other, and City). For each component, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)

598 , print, add

147 ,

edit

148 , delete

148 , import

588 , and export (template)

598

data. Then, using the grid options, you can enter

your tax provision data, add attachments

149

and review your entry's history.



See Data Table 732 for information about the grid options.


See Importing data.

588 or Exporting

598 Data Entry for more information about importing/exporting component


Data Entry Interface

The Data Entry list, appears in the Review & Edit data for all jurisdictions.


136 page. Here you can access components and enter your



1

Use Review & Edit in the Tax Provision Navigation Bar to access the Data Entry pages.

2

Use Data Entry to select and enter data for your components.

3

Use the tabs for Temporary Differences to enter Detail or Rollforward data.

4

Use the Data Entry ribbon to Add, Delete, Import, Export, and use the Data Table buttons to change how the data appears in the Data Table.

5

Use Grouping to group your data into a new order by dragging columns to this section of the page.

6

Use the Data Table to review your data entry information.


Adding Data Entry Components

When you create data entries in the system, they are assigned to a dataset. You will select a Base Dataset and then a component in the Data Entry list to add your entries.

click Delete in the components ribbon.

146


Attachments

Attachments let you attach documents and supplement detail for your data entry. The Attachments Review report for Provision and Interim datasets shows a list of documents that are attached to various components

23.


To attach a file to an entry:

  1. Double click in the Attmnts cell and the Attachments and Comments page opens.

  2. Click Browse to find the file.

  3. Type a Description.

  4. Click Add.

  5. Click Close Window.



IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UATTD# U AfterTx TDs-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import import process.

588 for more information about the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis data


After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data

Table

732

for more information about the grid options.


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code


TYPE

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the after tax temporary difference

427.

There are two types of temporary differences balances - Current and Non-Current 32 . Select the type that

best relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.


TAG

The tag


CLASS

27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.


BEGINNING BALANCE

The cumulative after tax temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset balance can be overridden manually or with an import.

22 . The beginning


Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.



ACTIVITY


IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UATTDAM# U AfterTxTD-Bk Tx Bas worksheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import data import process.

588 for more information about the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis


After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See

Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code


TYPE

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the after tax temporary difference

427.

There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current 32 . Select the type that best

relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.


TAG

The tag


CLASS

27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.


BEGINNING BALANCE

The beginning balance rolls over from the prior period and should represent the remaining temporary differences for book and tax that should be allocated. The beginning balance can be overridden manually or with an import.


Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.



ENTER ACTIVITY/ENTER ENDING

Select Enter Activity or Enter Ending balance to apply to both book and tax calculations:


DEFERRED

Deferred impacts 776 the deferred provision, as well as the deferred balances.


BALANCE SHEET ONLY


For the Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income, you can enter data in the following fields:

For Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income, the following fields are read only. To change these fields you must do so in the Unit Details page.

  • Estimated Pre-Tax Book Income

  • Estimated Q1 Pre-Tax Book Income

  • Estimated Q2 Pre-Tax Book Income

  • Estimated Q3 Pre-Tax Book Income

  • Estimated Q4 Pre-Tax Book Income

  • PTBI Data Entry Policy (Read only)

  • Weighted Avg FX Rate columns (Read only)

  • Estimated Annual Weighted Average FX Rate

  • Statutory Tax Rates

  • FX Rates (Deferred FX Rates)

  • Exclude Foreign Losses

  • Exclude Unit

  • Deferred Provision Adjustment Only


Forecast Pre-Tax Book Income


Flow-Through Factors

Flow-Through is used to transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another. It is useful when working with partnerships. To enable Flow-Through, an appropriate License Code and License Key are required.


For more information about licenses, see Manage Licenses

480.


For more information about Flow-Through refer to the Flow-Through


620

section.


Intercompany Transaction Entry

In the Data Entry list, you can select the InterCompany Transaction component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the InterCompany Transaction page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)


598 ,

print, add

147, edit

148 , delete

148, import

588, export (template)

598 , show/hide columns, and filter your

provision and estimated payment data. You will select Receiving or Paying to create a permanent difference in the unit.

Transactions among units can be set up to account for the movement of tax amounts and the impact of the associated withholding tax treatment on transactions. Entries can be entry on either the paying or receiving unit and are posted as a permanent difference on the units.


IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the InterCompany Transaction Entry page, complete the appropriate fields on the #ICOTXNS# Inter Co Txns sheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the InterCompany Transaction data import process.


INTERCOMPANY TRANSACTION


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The InterCompany Transaction component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.

732 for more


ATTMNTS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


SOURCE UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the InterCompany Transaction.


SOURCE UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the InterCompany Transaction.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


PAYING/RECEIVING UNIT

There can be intercompany transactions between any two units


TYPE

417 .

The options that display are established by an Administrator for transaction types

429 .


CODE

The transaction code is user-defined.

TAG

The tag


CLASS

27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.


DATE

The date of the transaction.


AMOUNT

The transaction amount for the intercompany transaction.


FX RATE (PAYING UNIT TO RECEIVING UNIT)

The weighted average rate that the paying unit uses to pay the receiving unit.


WITHHOLDING TAX RECEIVING UNIT

Percentage of the transaction amount that is withheld for the receiving unit.


TAXABLE AT RECEIVING UNIT

Designate if the transaction amount is taxable by the receiving unit. It is posted as a permanent difference.


DEDUCTIBLE AT PAYING UNIT

Designate if the transaction amount is deductible by the paying unit. It is posted as an offset permanent difference. Withholding Tax Treatment: Designate if the withholding is D for Deductible, C for Creditable, or N for Neither.


TREATMENT

Select if the transaction amount is Deductible or Creditable.


NOTE

You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."


NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis

In the Data Entry list, you can select the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export

(informational purposes)

598, print, add

147 , edit

148 , delete

148 , import

588 , export (template)

598, group

columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and estimated payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.


Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.



PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY



Payable Entry

In the Data Entry list, you can select the Payable Entry component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In

the Payable Entry page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)

598 , print, add

147 , edit

148, delete

148 , import

588 , export (template)

598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and

estimated payment data. You will select Receiving or Paying to create a permanent difference in the unit.


IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information in the Pre-Tax Book Income page, complete the appropriate fields on the #PTBI# PTBI worksheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the PTBI data import process.


Pre-Tax Book Income


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The Pre-Tax Book Income component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.

732 for more


ACTIONS

Actions enable you to attach documents and supplement detail for an adjustment. To Manage Attachments

30 double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.


PTBI DATA ENTRY POLICY

The PTBI Data Entry Policy is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.


WEIGHTED AVG FX RATE

The Weighted Avg FX Rate is established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code 20 and description are established by an Administrator for the Pre-Tax Book Income.


TAG

The tag


27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source. The Tag column only appears in Tag

Datasets.


CLASS

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The list of Classes are created and assigned in "Administration."


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line entered in the originating source. The list of Subclasses are created and assigned in "Administration."


AMOUNT (LOCAL)

Type the Local balance.


AMOUNT (REPORTING)

Type the Reporting balance.


NOTE

You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."


Tax Adjustments

In the Data Entry list, you can select the Tax Adjustments component to enter federal and jurisdiction data.

In the Tax Adjustments page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)

598 , print, add

147 , edit

148 ,

delete

148 , import

588 , export (template)

598 , group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision,

interim, and estimated payment data.


There are two types of Tax Adjustments, depending on the code, Cash and Non-Cash. Non-Cash Tax Adjustments have a code that begins with NC_. The cash provision is the amount of current tax liability that is expected to be represented on the tax return. The non-cash provision is any current taxes that should be accrued for prior years or for amounts that are not represented on the tax return. The Cash and Non-Cash are

segregated on separate lines of the Tax Provision 261 report.


Note: If you wish to adjust the same after tax adjustment more than once, you must make additional entries using different tag letters or classes.



IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the Tax Adjustments page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UTA# Unit Tax Adjs sheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Tax Adjustments data import process.


Tax Adjustments


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The Tax Adjustments component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.

732 for more


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Tax Adjustments.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Tax Adjustments.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Tax Adjustments.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION


Temp Diffs - Tax Basis - RollForward


Temp Diffs - Tax Basis - RollForward Details


DATA ENTRY FIELDS - ROLLFORWARD

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The Temporary Differences - Tax Basis and Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis component grid

includes the following columns. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.


TAG DATASETS

EDIT

Edit lets you edit the data for the adjustment. Click to add an attachment.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for an adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the temporary difference

424 .


BEGINNING BALANCE

Beginning balances are read-only.


TYPE

There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current


32. Select the type that best

relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.


OVERRIDE UNIT RATES

You can override the unit rates designated under Unit Details for a specific temporary difference line by


clicking the Override unit rates check box.


BOOK AMOUNT

Enter the Book amount. The system displays the Tax-Book Difference based on how it should display in the Deferred Rollforward name listed.


TAX AMOUNT

Enter the Tax amount. The system displays the Tax-Book Difference based on how it should display in the Deferred Rollforward name listed.


CLASS DATASETS

UNIT CODE

The code

20 is established by an Administrator for the temporary difference

424 .


UNIT NAME

You can select the Temp Diff Code - Name.


OVERRIDE UNIT RATES

You can override the designated unit rates for a temporary difference.


BEGINNING BALANCE

Beginning balances are Read-Only.


UNASSIGNED

Type the unassigned balance in the Tax column for the Deferred Rollforward column.


ENDING BALANCE

Ending balances are Read-Only.


Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis

In the Data Entry list, you can select the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)

598 , print, add

147, edit

148 , delete

148, import

588, export (template)

598 , group columns, show/hide columns,

and filter your provision and estimated payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.

You have the ability to enter beginning and ending balances for both book and tax balances. ONESOURCE Tax Provision calculates the tax adjustment by taking the difference between the beginning and ending balances.


Note: The mapping functionality is not yet available for the Excel Add-In.



PROVISION DATASET ONLY


Note: To use default unit rates, enter U in the rate columns when importing. For more information on importing, refer to the Importing Templates documentation.



IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields in the #UTDAM# U Temp Diff-Bk Tx Basis tab in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis data import process.


Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table more information about the grid options.

732 for


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the temporary difference

424 .


ADJ TYPE

There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current


32 . Select the type that best

relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.


TAG

The tag


CLASS

27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.


BEGINNING BALANCE

The beginning balance rolls over from the prior period and should represent the remaining temporary differences for book and tax that should be allocated. The beginning balance can be overridden manually or with an import.


Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.



ENTER ACTIVITY/ENTER ENDING

You can choose the entry type in Administration.


MONTHS

The months entered for both book and tax are used to compute the ratable amount applicable to the period.


OVERRIDE UNIT RATES

You can override the unit rates designated under Unit Details for a specific temporary difference line by clicking the Override unit rates check box.


TAG DATASETS

  1. In Administration, select Manage Temp Diff Postings (Tag Only).

  2. For a Code, select Use Ending and then Temp Diff Entry Type.


CLASS DATASETS

  1. In Administration, select Manage Data Options and then Classes & Subclasses.

  2. Select Component Types.

  3. For each Class, choose Post to Ending Balance and the Data Entry Rule.


    ENTER ACTIVITY/ENTER ENDING

261 removes the BSO


ENDING BALANCE

The ending balance is based on the months entered. You must populate this field if the dataset is not rolled over. Select the class assigned in Deferred Rollforwards to post and enter the ending balance.


Trial Balance /Tax Basis

In the Data Entry list, you can select the Trial Balance/Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction

data. In the Trial Balance/Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)

598 , print, add

147 ,

edit

148 , delete

148 , import

588 , export (template)

598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your

provision and estimated payment data.


This area populates the ending trial balance amounts and allows you to make book adjustments, tax reclasses, and other adjustments. This can ultimately be used as the starting point for the tax basis balance sheet. Typically, the trial balance data is bridged into the system from an extract of the general ledger.


IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the Trial Balance/Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #UTBBS# Unit Tax Basis BalSheet worksheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the Trial Balance/Tax Basis data import process.


Trial Balance/Tax Basis


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The Trial Balance/Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.

732 for more


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the Trial Balance/Tax Basis

UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the Trial Balance/Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the Trial Balance/Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code


TAG

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the trial balance sublines

431 .

The tag


CLASS

27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class.


ENDING BOOK BALANCE

Populates the trial balance ending balance data for the period.

Book Adjustments: Book adjustments to the ending balances can be made to generate the adjusted ending balances.


TAX RECLASS

Tax reclasses can be made to the adjusted ending balances.


OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

Other adjustments can be made to the adjusted ending balances.


NOTE

You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."


State Specific Data Entry

In the Data Entry list, you can select a component to enter state data for all jurisdictions (State, Province, All Other, and City).


Data Entry - Components


See Manage States


436

for more information about creating user-defined states in the system.


State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis

In the Data Entry list, you can select the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences -

Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)

598 , print, add

147 , edit

148 , delete

148 ,

import

588 , export (template)

598, group columns, show/hide columns, and filter your provision and estimated

payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.


Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.



PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY


Note: To use default unit rates enter U in the rate columns when importing.



IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis screen complete the appropriate fields on the #SAATD# St AfterApp TD-Tax Bas sheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import 588 for more information about the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences -

Tax Basis data import process.


State After App Temp Diffs - Tax Basis

DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component grid includes the following

columns. See Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code difference


TYPE

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the state after apportionment temporary

438 .

There are two types of temporary differences balances - Current and Non-Current 32. Select the type that

best relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.


TAG

The tag 27


CLASS

letter identifies each line entered on the originating source.

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.


BEGINNING BALANCE

The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset can be overridden manually or with an import.

22. The beginning balance


Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances, and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.



ACTIVITY


IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page complete the appropriate fields on the #SATTD# St AfterTax TD-Tax Bas sheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import data import process.

588 for more information about the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis


State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis



DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See

Data Table 732 for more information about the grid options.


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for the adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code

437 .


TYPE

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the state after tax temporary difference

There are two types of temporary difference balances - Current and Non-Current 32 . Select the type that best

relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.


TAG

The tag 27 letter identifies each line entered on the originating source.


CLASS

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.


BEGINNING BALANCE

The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset can be overridden manually or with an import.

22. The beginning balance


Note: The administrator can lock beginning balances, and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.



ACTIVITY


TYPE

Select E-Equity Adjustment or P- P&L Adjustment from the drop-down list.


TAG

Select a value from the drop-down list.


CLASS

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.


AMOUNT

Positive amounts increase and negative amounts reduce the taxable income. Amounts should be entered in local currency. They are translated to reporting currency using the unit's weighted average FX rate.


NOTE

You can type notes to supplement the adjustment. You can access a history of the Notes within "Data Source History."


State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis

In the Data Entry list, you can select the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis component to enter federal and jurisdiction data. In the StateTemp Diffs - Tax Basis page, you can refresh, export (informational purposes)

598 , print, add

147, edit

148 , delete

148, import

588, export (template)

598 , group columns, show/hide columns,

and filter your Provision, Interim Actual, Interim Forecast, and Estimated Payment data. There are two tabs available to enter your data: Detail and Rollforward.


Note: Tax Basis Temporary Difference screens allow you to enter amounts as purely tax balances, with or without book or net of book.


PROVISION AND INTERIM (ACTUAL SECTION) DATASETS ONLY


Note: To use default unit rates type U in the rate columns when importing.



IMPORT TEMPLATE

To import information to the State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis page, complete the appropriate fields on the #STD# St TD-Tax Basis sheet in the Import Numbers template.

See Data Entry Import import process.

588 for more information about the State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis data


State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis


DATA ENTRY FIELDS

The grid lets you enter amounts and select options from the drop-down lists. You can use the tab key to move between the fields much like an excel worksheet.

The StateTemp Diffs - Tax Basis component grid includes the following columns. See Data Table information about the grid options.

732 for more


ACTIONS

Actions allow you to supplement the adjustment with detail. Double click to add an attachment.


DATA SOURCE

Data Source enables you to view the Data Source History. The Transfer Out balance appears in data source history for the Source unit.


DATASET

The Dataset selected in the Base Dataset drop-down list.


UNIT CODE

The Unit Code is established by an Administrator for the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.


UNIT NAME

The Unit Name is established by an Administrator for the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.


CURRENCY SYMBOL

The Currency Symbol is established by an Administrator for the State Temp Diffs - Tax Basis.


JURISDICTION

Jurisdiction lets you select the jurisdiction for an adjustment.


CODE - DESCRIPTION

The code


TYPE

20 and description are established by an Administrator for the temporary difference

424 .

There are two types of temporary differences balances - Current and Non-Current 32. Select the type that

best relates to the balance sheet account where the deferred tax asset or liability should be represented.


TAG

The tag


CLASS

27 letter identifies each line entered in the originating source.

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. The DEF-Default is the default class and assigned in administration.


SUBCLASS

The subclass identifies each line description entered in the originating source. You can select Next Value as the subclass and the application generates the next "Code" number for the selected Code, Type and Class. The Default-Default is the default subclass and assigned in administration.


BEGINNING BALANCE

The cumulative temporary difference balance rolls forward from the prior dataset can be overridden manually or with an import.


22. The beginning balance


Note: The administrator has the ability to lock beginning balances, and the Beginning Bal column does not allow data entry for Read/Write Users.



ACTIVITY


335


Run a Report

To run a report:

  1. Select a dataset in the Dataset drop-down list. In the list, you will see the Dataset Name, Year, Period, Type and Data Option.

  2. Select the level of reporting in the Report Level drop-down list. In the list, you will see the Display Name, Code, and Type. For example, you can choose a Unit or Consolidated type.

  3. Click Local or Reporting for your reports.

  4. In the report list, select a report to run. For example, click Tax Provision.

  5. Click Options to open the options menu.

  6. Select the Format, Report Options and Class Options that apply.

  7. Click Run.


    Reporting


    Format

    FREEZE


Report Options


TAX PROVISION REPORT (ONLY)

To select Report Options for the Tax Provision Report:

  1. Select Reporting and then a report.

  2. Select View and then Summary or Detail.

  3. Select Breakout and then Class.


Report Options


Class Options

The reports that utilize the Class Options include:


To select Class Options:

  1. Select a Class (All Classes or a specific class).

  2. Click a Class or Group.

  3. Click Run.


    Class Options


    My Reports

    In My Reports, you can create User-Defined reports by saving the Report Options and Format along with a user-defined report name.


    Click to open the repository and see My Reports. When you select a Dataset, you can see all of the reports and folders added to the repository for that dataset.


My Reports


Creating User-Defined Reports

To create a user defined report:

  1. Click to add a new report to My Reports.

  2. In Add New Report, choose the Report Name Rule.

  3. In Custom Text, you can type a custom name, for example, Reports for External Auditor.

  4. In Folder Location, choose a folder where you want the report to reside. The report will be saved in the selected folder or subfolder location.


My Reports


Applying Multiple Datasets to a Report

The option Apply to Multiple lets multiple datasets share a report. To apply a report to multiple datasets:

  1. Select Datasets to apply the report to multiple datasets.

  2. Click Next. A grid with the available datasets will appear. The dataset selected in the Reporting page is automatically selected.

  3. Select the datasets that will share the report.


Add New Report - Datasets


Add New Report - Apply to Datasets


Applying Units/Sub-Conslidations/Filing Groups

The option Apply to Multiple lets multiple units, Sub-consolidations or Filing Groups share a report.


To apply a report to multiple units:

  1. Select Units to apply the report to multiple units.

  2. Click Next. A grid with the available units, Sub-consolidations or Filing Groups will appear. The unit, Sub-consolidation, or Filing Group selected in the Reporting page is automatically selected.

  3. Select the units, Sub-consolidations or Filing Groups that will share the report.


    Add New Report - Units


    Add New Report - Apply to Units


    Shared Reports

    Using Shared Reports lets you share the same report between multiple datasets, units, sub-consolidations and filing groups. Multiple users can also view a shared report (as long as the users have permissions to the dataset or unit). Administrators can share reports with all users to ensure consistent reporting.


    Click to open the repository and see Shared Reports. When you select a Dataset, you can see all of the reports and folders added to the repository for that dataset.


Reporting - Shared Reports: Example of the Shared Reports Naming Convention


Batch Reports

You can select multiple folders or reports in the My Reports/Shared Reports repository, then submit the reports to a User Defined batch for batch printing. The reports can run while you continue to work in the Tax Provision application. The reports will be available for 24 hours upon completion of the batch. Note that you can add Plug-In Reports to My Reports and print them as custom reports.


See My Reports 237 for more information about adding new reports.


To Create Batch Reports:

  1. Click and select the reports to submit for batch printing.

  2. Click and the Submit Selected Reports dialog box appears.

  3. Enter a Batch Name and then select the Output Type.


You can select the following additional options for your batch reports.

  1. Group by report level in separate files: When you select this option, submitted reports with a common report level are saved into separate files and zipped. Otherwise, all reports are saved in one file.

  2. Compressed report: Select this option to zip the file. The option will automatically be selected when the Group by report level option is selected.


Submit Selected Reports


Once created, the Batch Reports are listed by Batch Name.

  1. Click to see the list of batch reports.

  2. You can check the status of the submitted batch reports, including the details of the batch print.

  3. To analyze a report, click Download and save the batch report.


Batch Reports


Notes

Use Notes to create User-Defined notes for a report. You must Run a report to enable the Notes button. When you select the notes field appears at the bottom of the page for entering data.


Save Options

You can save files in CSV, PDF, XLSX, and XLS file formats. The reports you create use a standard format for all reports to include time, date stamp, page numbers as well as the header for client name, report title, and unit/sub-consolidations.


Click to save your report in a CSV, PDF, XLSX, or XLS file format.


Reports saved as XLSX:


Sheet


Printing Reports


After you run a report, you can print it. The report will print using the options you selected in Page Setup

245 .


To print a report:

  1. Select a report and click Run.

  2. Click Print and the Print dialog box opens.

  3. Click OK to print the report.

    Reporting Hyperlinks

    You can use embedded reporting hyperlinks links to validate and drill into some of the more complex values calculated in ONESOURCE Tax Provision. The reports are linked so that you can easily go back and forth between reports.



Reporting – Interim Forecast Rate and Forecast State Rate hyperlinks


The Forecast Deferred Provision report has hyperlinks to the Forecast Rate report.

Reporting - Forecast Deferred Provision hyperlinks


Reporting Overview & Reference Information

Overview of basic reports and available reporting levels report.

36. Click a link to view information about a specific

REPORT NAME

DATASET TYPE

UNIT

FILING GROUP

CONSOL

SUB- CONSOL

Federal






Forecast Rate

Intrm 342

Forecast Deferred Provision

Intrm 342

Forecast True Up

Intrm 341



Tax Provision

Prov 261 /Est Pymt

257

Tax Provision GAAP - STAT

Prov/Intrm 264

Tax Provision - Interim

Intrm 258


Federal Est Pymt

Est Pymt 346


Effective Tax Rate

Prov/ 270 Intrm 275

Effective Tax Rate – Breakout

Prov 708




Deferred Balances

Prov/Intrm 277

Deferred Workpaper

Prov/Intrm 295


Expected Deferred Rate

Prov/Intrm 313



NOL Balances

Prov/ 292 Intrm 313


NOLs Expiration

Prov/Intrm 294

Temporary Difference Summary

Prov/Intrm 284


Temporary Difference Summary (Fed Filing Group)

Prov 286


Net Deferred Tax Assets/ Liabilities

Prov/Intrm 288


Unit Summary

Prov/Intrm 255


Foreign/Domestic Summary

Prov/Intrm 280


Payable Rollforward

Prov/Intrm 335

Payable Detail

Prov/Intrm 337

AMT Estimator

Prov/Est Pymt 348


ü





REPORT NAME

DATASET TYPE

UNIT

FILING GROUP

CONSOL

SUB- CONSOL

Tax Basis Balance Sheet

Prov/Intrm 298


Tax Basis Income Statement

Prov 300


Trial Balance - Balance Sheet

Intrm 301


Trial Balance - Income Statement

Intrm 302


Flow Through

Prov 297


APIC Pool Summary

Prov/Intrm 304


Journal Entry Reports

Prov/Intrm 339


Attachments Review

Prov/Intrm 306


User Status

Prov/Intrm 306




State/Jurisdiction






State Summary

Prov 297





Forecast State Rate

Intrm 315


Provision Summary

Prov/Est Pymt/ Intrm 309


State Est Pymt Summary

Est Pymt 332



State/Unit Summary

Prov/Intrm 310


Deferred Balances

Prov/Intrm 311


Expected Deferred Rate

Prov//Intrm 313



State Specific

Prov 297





Tax Provision

Prov 318 /Est Pymt/

328Intrm 333


Legacy Tax Provision

Prov 321 /EstPymt

330


State Est Pymt

Est Pymt 332




Deferred Balances

Prov/Intrm 324


Payable Rollforward

Prov/Intrm 335


Payable Detail

Prov/Intrm 337



Self Reconciliation of Reports

Computed amounts for all Reports, based on the selections made in a reporting level, always agree with one another. Each report shows different views or aspects of the data, but common line items (for example, Total Provision, Effective Tax Rate) always agree in all other reports at the reporting level.

Parameters for Reports

You can use parameters to configure additional functionality, calculations, and report views.


Interim Provision/Interim Effective Tax Rate

Administrators can use the dataset parameter 57, USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR, to show different line

items in the Interim Tax Provision and Interim Effective Tax Rate reports. You can select the Detail view of the report to see the underlying balances that make up the Total Pre-Tax Book Income.


The interim effective tax rate is calculated in two ways. The designation is made by using the

USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR dataset parameter 57 with a parameter value of 0 or 1.

  1. If you set the dataset Parameter Value to "0", the report starts with total consolidated pre-tax book income and subtracts the pre-tax book income of Exclude Foreign Loss and Exclude Units. There are four lines of data – Total Pre-Tax Book Income, Less: Excluded Units, Less: Excluded Foreign Losses, and Total Adjusted Pre-Tax Book Income - Actual.

    Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR

    Parameter Value: 0


  2. If you set the Parameter Value to "1", the report adds the pre-tax book income of all units and builds up to total consolidated pre-tax book income. There are four lines of data – Included Units, Excluded Units, Excluded Foreign Losses, and Total Pre-Tax Book Income – Actual.

Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR

Parameter Value: 1


Note: The dataset parameter USE_WWPTBI_INTPROVETR applies to both the Reporting and Reporting (Legacy) reports.



Interim Forecast State Rate

You can calculate the forecast state rate two ways. The designation is made by using the

USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE dataset parameter 57 with a paramvalue of 0 or 1.

  1. If you set the dataset Parameter Value to "0", the system uses consolidated pre-tax book income that includes only units with an active state record.

    Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE

    Parameter Value: 0


  2. If you set the Parameter Value to "1”, the system uses consolidated pre-tax book income that includes the pre-tax book income of all units, regardless of whether is has an active or inactive state record.

    Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE

    Parameter Value: 1


    Note: The dataset parameter USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE applies to both Reporting and Reporting (Legacy) reports.



    Allow Multiple Currencies in Reports


261


Tax Provision Unit Comparison

With the Tax Provision Unit Comparison, you can select two datasets and compare the balances in a report. You will see the balances in the columns D1, D2, and Diff:Total for the comparison report.


To compare two datasets:

  1. In the navigation bar, select Reporting and then Tax Provision Unit Comparison.

  2. Select the first dataset in the Select Dataset 1 drop-down list.

  3. Select the second dataset in the Select Dataset 2 drop-down list.

  4. Select Reporting Currency or Local Currency in the Select Currency drop-down list.


    Tax Provision GAAP - STAT

    The Tax Provision GAAP – STAT report for the Provision and Interim datasets creates an overview of the provision calculations and the separation of the components between GAAP to STAT and STAT to TAX. Supporting detail for some calculations can be viewed in this report, while underlying support for other items is detailed on separate reports.


    The Tax Provision GAAP – STAT report is available only when the following system parameters are activated.


Tax Provision GAAP - STAT Dataset Comparison

With the Tax Provision GAAP-STAT Dataset Comparison, you can select two datasets and compare the balances in a report. You will see the balances in the columns D1, D2, and Diff:Total for the comparison report.


To compare two datasets:

  1. In the navigation bar, select Reporting and then Tax Provision GAAP - STAT Dataset Comparison.

  2. Select the first dataset in the Select Dataset 1 drop-down list.

  3. Select the second dataset in the Select Dataset 2 drop-down list.

  4. Select Reporting Currency or Local Currency in the Select Currency drop-down list.


    FERC

    Use the FERC Regulated report to control which columns the activity appears. You can activate the Regulated parameters in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > Regulated.



Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison

With the Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison, you can select two datasets and compare the balances in a report. You will see the balances in the columns D1, D2, and Diff:Total for the comparison report.


To compare two datasets:

  1. In the navigation bar, select Reporting and then Effective Tax Rate Dataset Comparison.

  2. Select the first dataset in the Select Dataset 1 drop-down list.

  3. Select the second dataset in the Select Dataset 2 drop-down list.

  4. Select Reporting Currency or Local Currency in the Select Currency drop-down list.

  5. Click OK.


    Effective Tax Rate CSC Breakout

    Available only at the sub-consolidated level for Provision datasets, the Effective Tax Rate Breakout report displays a detail and summarized view of all the components at the group rate selected for the dataset and the effective tax rate calculated in the provision calculation.


    PROVISION ITEMS

261 - Deferred Tax Provision or State Summary


310

- Provision Summary

309 - State Deferred Tax Provision line in a Provision dataset. Interim Provision Report 258 - Deferred

Tax Provision line or State Summary an Interim dataset.

310 - Provision Summary

309 - State Deferred Tax Provision line in

261 - Equity Adjustment or State Summary

310 - Provision Summary

309 -

State Equity Adjustment line in a Provision dataset. Interim Provision Report 258 - Equity Adjustment

line or State Summary

310


167


317 - Tax Provision


318



EXPECTED DEFERRED RATE REPORT

The report will appear in the Legacy report list when you

  1. Select a sub-consolidated or consolidated report level.

  2. Activate a state jurisdiction in at least one unit.


    ESTIMATED PAYMENT TYPE DATASETS ONLY:


Note: Administrators assign datasets to Analysis in the Analysis Datasets Tax Provision Administration.


Accessing Analysis

To access the Analysis page:

403 folder within ONESOURCE

  1. In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the Available Datasets page opens.



  2. In the Available Datasets page, for Step 1 Select Datasets, choose the datasets to analyze.



  3. For Step 2, Select Currency, choose Reporting and Local. You can select one or both currencies.



  4. Click Save.

  5. Click Dashboard


    357 to view your data.

  6. Click Report 368 to access reports.


Notes:



Dashboard

In Analysis, Dashboards provide a way to visualize data. Dashboards are created by the Designer and then assigned to End Users. You can view dashboards in the Dashboard page. If multiple dashboards are available, they appear in the list of tabs at the bottom of the page.


To open a Dashboard:

  1. In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.

  2. Select Dashboard at the top of the page to view your data.

  3. At the bottom of the page, you can choose the tab with the dashboard in which to review. You can see this list of tabs only if multiple dashboards are available.

  4. In the Dashboard page, you can select options to change the presentation of your data. You can adjust the dashboard settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to save.

Dashboard


Note: If a Designer did not create and assign a dashboard to the Dashboard, by default the Report page opens. In the report page, End Users can see the Repository list and find assigned reports within the Shared Analysis folder. A Designer must create and assign reports, to the reports page, in order for them to appear in the reports page.



Dashboard Toolbar

The dashboard toolbar has the following buttons:

Previous: Undoes the most recent action.


Next: Restores the most recent action that was undone.


Refresh: Updates the dashboard with current data.


Bookmark: Opens the Bookmark menu, in which you can save a bookmark or load a previously saved bookmark. By using a bookmark, you can save modifications (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations) that they have made to the dashboard.

When you reopen the bookmark in the future, the settings that they saved are reapplied to the current data.


Email: Sends an export of the dashboard to another person.


Print: Prints the dashboard on any available printer.


Export: Exports a copy of the dashboard to Excel, PowerPoint or PDF format.


Using Bookmarks

By using a bookmark, you can save your current dashboard settings (filter selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth), so that you can return to these settings at a later time. The following sections explain how to work with bookmarks.


Saving Dashboard Settings in a New Bookmark

To save a dashboard configuration as a new bookmark:

  1. Adjust the dashboard settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to save.

  2. Select the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.

  3. Select the Save as New Bookmark option. This opens the Bookmark Properties dialog box.



  4. If desired, enter a name for the new bookmark in the Name field. (The default bookmark name is the current date/time.)



  5. Select Private to make the bookmark visible to a user. Select Shared so other users of the dashboard can use the bookmark.


    If you select Shared and All Users, then users can share the bookmark with all dashboard users or select Same Groups to share the bookmark only with users that belong to one or more of the current user groups. (User groups are configured by an administrator.)


  6. Choose the Read-only option so other users cannot modify this bookmark. Otherwise, any user who shares this bookmark can change the bookmark settings.

  7. Click OK to save the bookmark.


Restoring Settings from a Bookmark

To restore a dashboard to the settings saved in a bookmark:

  1. Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.



  2. Select the bookmark to restore.



The dashboard is updated with the settings previously saved in the bookmark.


Updating an Existing Bookmark with New Settings

To update a bookmark with new settings:

  1. Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.



  2. Select the bookmark to update. This bookmark is now the active bookmark.



  3. Make any desired changes to the dashboard settings (selections, input components and so forth).

  4. (Optional) Click the Bookmark button again, and note that the active bookmark is highlighted.

  5. Select the Save Current Bookmark option or press Ctrl-S on the keyboard. (On Internet Explorer, press Ctrl-Alt-S.) This updates the active bookmark with the current dashboard settings.


Note: You can only update a bookmark in which you have write permission. You can only update the default bookmark (the bookmark shown in italics or the Home bookmark) if you have write permission for the dashboard.



Deleting a Bookmark

To delete a bookmark:

  1. Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.



  2. Right-click on the bookmark to delete, and select Remove from the context menu.



Note: You can only delete a bookmark in which they have write permission. (The Home bookmark cannot be deleted.)



Modifying a Bookmark

To change the name or sharing settings for a bookmark:

  1. Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.



  2. Right-click on the bookmark to change, and select Properties from the context menu. This opens the Bookmark Properties dialog box.



  3. Make the desired changes to the bookmark name and sharing. See Saving Dashboard Settings in a

    New Bookmark

    359

    for more information about these settings.



  4. Click OK to update the bookmark name and sharing.


Note: You can only modify a bookmark that they have created. (The Home bookmark cannot be modified.)



Setting Initial Dashboard State with a Default Bookmark

The default bookmark for a dashboard specifies the settings (filter selections, menu choices, annotations) that are in effect each time you re-open the dashboard. The default bookmark, therefore, specifies the “starting state” of the dashboard.


If you have not yet bookmarked the desired dashboard state, see Saving Dashboard Settings in a New

Bookmark

359 .


To set an existing bookmark as the default bookmark:


  1. Click the Bookmark button in the right side of the toolbar. This opens the Bookmark menu.



  2. Right-click on the bookmark to set it as the dashboard's starting state, and select Set As Default. The dashboard will open with the settings defined by this default bookmark.



The default bookmark is subsequently shown in italics.

If you do not specify a default bookmark for a dashboard, the dashboard opens with the settings defined by the Home bookmark. To remove the default designation from a bookmark, simply designate a different user- created bookmark or the Home bookmark as the default.


Exporting a Dashboard for Viewing

You can export an image of an entire dashboard, or export data from a particular dashboard component.


To export a copy of the dashboard into Excel, PowerPoint or PDF format:

  1. Click the Export button in the dashboard toolbar. This opens the Export dialog box.

  2. Select the Content tab, and make the following selections:

    1. Choose the export format: Excel, PowerPoint, PDF or Snapshot.



      The Snapshot option produces a portable version of the dashboard that incorporates an embedded (static) copy of the underlying data. This “snapshot” dashboard can be loaded into another server installation using an incremental deployment or into InetSoft products such as Style Scope Free Edition (http:// www.dashboardfree.com).


    2. Select Match Layout to obtain the closest possible match between the appearance of the exported copy and the original dashboard.

    3. Select Current View to include the current state of the dashboard in the exported file.

    4. Select the bookmarks to include in the exported file. The selected views are converted to individual pages (PowerPoint and PDF) or sheets (Excel) in the exported copy.


      Note: An anonymous user cannot save to the repository, and a Snapshot cannot be saved to the repository.



  3. Select the Location tab, and make the following selections:

    1. Choose Desktop to save the exported file onto the local machine.

    2. Choose Report Repository and select a repository location to save the exported file onto the server.



      When you export a dashboard to the repository, the dashboard will appear (with a different icon) within the repository menu; however is not supplied with live data. Rather, the exported dashboard will exist as an archive, reflecting the state of the data at the time that the export was made.

  4. Click OK to close the dialog box and proceed with the export.


Report Repository

The Report Repository is a web-based repository (or report management), which enables you to share and manage reports between users or groups. In the Report page, you can access the Repository, which

contains three folders: ONESOURCE Default Reports

368 , My Analysis

370 , and Shared Analysis

370 . End

Users can choose from a list of reports within the folders to review their data. Reports appear in the "Repository" list only after a "Designer" creates and assigns them to the report repository.


To access reports:

  1. In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.

  2. Click Report and the Repository list appears.


ONESOURCE Default Reports

In the Reporting page, the Repository


368

contains the ONESOURCE Default Reports folder which includes

two reports: Tax Expense Validation configured reports.

368 and Deferred Balance Validation

369. You cannot modify these pre-


Tax Expense Validation Report

The Tax Expense Validation report provides the tax expense in a pivot table format with hierarchies. You can select from the multiple filters as well as choose side-by-side comparisons for local and reporting currencies. This report includes both classes and subclasses in the same reports and access to the underlying data for the tag and class/subclass level.


Deferred Balance Validation Report

The Deferred Balance Validation report provides the deferred balance in a pivot table format with hierarchies. You can select from the multiple filters as well as choose side-by-side comparisons for local and reporting currencies. This report includes both classes and subclasses in the same reports and access to the underlying data for the tag and class/subclass level.


My Analysis

In the Reporting page, the Repository contains the My Analysis folder which includes a list of End User reports. End Users can choose reports in the shared analysis folder to review their data. Reports appear in the Repository list only after a Designer creates and assigns them to the report repository.


To access reports:

  1. In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.

  2. Click Report and the Repository list appears.

  3. In the Repository list, click My Analysis and a list of End User reports appear.

  4. You can adjust the report settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to view.


Shared Analysis

In the Reporting page, the Repository contains the Shared Analysis folder which includes a list of End User reports. End Users can choose reports in the shared analysis folder to review their data. Reports appear in the Repository list only after a Designer creates and assigns them to the report repository.


To access reports:

  1. In the navigation bar, choose Analysis and the analysis page opens.

  2. Click Report and the Repository list appears.

  3. In the Repository list, click Shared Analysis and a list of End User reports appear.

  4. You can adjust the report settings (filtering selections, menu choices, annotations, and so forth) as desired to obtain the configuration that you want to view.


    Design

    ONESOURCE Tax Provision Analysis Designer is a functionality that you can use with Tax Provision and Global Access applications. A license is required to utilize this functionality. Analysis offers an extensive set of features, and ONESOURCE Tax Provision provides mandatory training as well as support to help you master the functionality. Contact your Account Manager or Services contact with any questions regarding the Analysis functionality.


    Workpapers

    You can access the ONESOURCE Workpapers application, however, you must have the following items in place.

375 , which will appear in the Data


Settings


Excel Add-in Download

If you are a licensed ONESOURCE Excel Add-in user, you can download the add-in and install it on your PC. When you open Excel Professional, the add-in appears in the Add-Ins tab of the ribbon control.

The ONESOURCE Excel Add-in is available in both a 32- and 64-bit version. If you have a 32-bit version of Excel Professional, you should install the 32-bit version of ONESOURCE Excel Add-in. If you have a 64-bit version of Excel Professional, you should install the 64-bit version of ONESOURCE Excel Add-in.


ONESOURCE Excel Add-in requires Microsoft Excel Professional 2007 or later.


If you have a license to use ONESOURCE Excel Add-in, a series of Excel Add-in commands are displayed in the Help menu.


To download the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in:

  1. From the Settings command in the navigation bar of ONESOURCE Tax Provision, select Excel Add- in/Download Excel Add-in. Download Excel Add-in appears. This page contains separate download links for the 32- and 64-bit versions of the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in installation program.

  2. Click the download link that is appropriate for the version of Microsoft Excel you have installed on your PC. For more information about determining whether you have a 32- or 64-bit version of Excel, consult your Excel online help.

  3. When you click the download link, a dialog box appears asking whether you want to open or save exceladdinsetup.zip. Save the archive on your PC.

  4. Open the location in which you saved exceladdinsetup.zip.

  5. Right-click exceladdinsetup.zip and in the menu that appears, choose Extract All...


If you're using Windows 7 - In the dialog that appears, choose a location in which to extract the archived installation files, or accept the default. Mark the Show extracted files when complete selection and then click Extract.


To install the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in:

  1. In the Explorer window that appeared when you extracted exceladdinsetup.zip, exceladdinsetup, double-click the Setup icon. One or more messages may appear, depending upon your system's configuration:

  2. When the first step of the ONESOURCE Excel Add-in Setup Wizard appears, click Next.

  3. Follow the instructions in the Setup Wizard to install ONESOURCE Excel Add-in.


    Administration

    This topic discusses how to establish the system setup information required for data entry in Administration. You will find the details for User-defined options, including general setup, user permissions, parameters, and querying the database.


    A company's specific configurations in the system are known as categories. Administrators establish category items in Administration.


589


410


Manage Datasets


Datasets

In Administration


376 > Manage Datasets


378



  1. An empty dataset

  2. A copied dataset

    383 creates a new dataset to enter new information, not already in the application.

    389 creates a new dataset with information already in the application.

  3. A rolled over dataset 387 creates a new dataset and includes the beginning deferred balances.

  4. Multiple datasets are combined using the Reporting Dataset

404 or Combined Dataset


392

feature.

These functionality combine two or more datasets, and associated components. The combined dataset will not reflect which dataset that a component originated.


Use the following options when creating a dataset.

Name


Fiscal Year

Assign a Fiscal Year to the dataset. By default, the current year appears in the Fiscal Year field. You can type a year or select a year from the drop-down list.


Fiscal Period

Assign a Fiscal Period


750


to the dataset. The Fiscal Period defines whether the data in a dataset represents

a month, several months, a quarter, or a year. You can type a year or select a year from the drop-down list.


Group Rate %

Type the Group Rate. The Effective Tax Rate report uses the group rate as the statutory rate to which the provision reconciles.


Case Number

An optional field primarily for exporting data to compliance software.


ID

The system assigns a unique identification number to the dataset.


Transaction

Select a Transaction option so the system can determine which data entry fields to populate. For example, the system can copy or rollover data to populate data entry fields. You also have the option to create an empty dataset which will have no data in the data entry fields.

  1. Create an Empty dataset which contains no data.

  2. Copy an existing dataset and all information in the copied dataset resides in the new dataset.

  3. Rollover a dataset and the system creates a dataset for the sequential period. The ending balances and rates in the dataset are the beginning balances and rates in the rolled over dataset.

  4. Combine datasets and the group of datasets generate a single combined dataset 392 . Some

    limitations apply to the combine functionality. Please review the combined dataset to ensure accurate calculations appear in the reports. The combine function assumes the rates entered for the calculations. Certain entries and balances sometimes differ from a reporting dataset using the same datasets.


    Apply Data Options

    Select Tags or Class/Subclasses when creating a new dataset.


Archived

Archived datasets are similar to Read-only datasets. If you archive a dataset, it will not appear in All Datasets or My Review list within My Datasets.


Dataset Relations

With Dataset Relations, you assign (1) tax return data (RTP Return) to the (2) final provision (RTP Provision) and (3) current provision data (RTP Target). Then, the system can automatically update the current tax provision dataset (RTP Target) through the calculation and posting of RTP true-ups.


RTP Return

A PROV type dataset with the filed tax return data.


RTP Provision

A PROV type dataset with the final tax provision data.


RTP Target

A PROV type dataset with the current year tax provision data.


For RTP adjustments to be posted, a Tax Return dataset (RTP Return) that has the filed tax return data must be related to:

  1. The same or previous period dataset with Provision data (RTP Provision) (final provision).

  2. The same or future period Target dataset (current year tax provision).


Locked/Unlock Subcons

You can Lock and Unlock Subcons within a dataset. You cannot edit or import data into a locked dataset.


Search Datasets

To filter the dataset list,

  1. In the Name column select the filter.

  2. In the Search field, type the alpha-numeric information and click Apply. The new list appears.

  3. Click Clear in the filter, to clear the information in the Search field.


Import Datasets

To import a new dataset, complete the appropriate fields on the #CD# Datasets sheet in the import categories template.


Other Dataset Options

You select the following options when creating a dataset.


Sub-Consolidations

Sub-Consolidations allow you to combine units and create additional views of data.


Attachments

You can support data by attaching documentation files data entries.


Active Workpapers is listed in application

You can rollover the Active Workpaper Mapping in Tax Provision's administration apart from the dataset rollover.


My Reports

You can copy custom reports options when adding a dataset.


Shared Reports

You can share a report when adding a dataset.


Report Footnotes

You can copy the report footnotes when adding a dataset.


Security Access

You can copy the user's permissions when adding a dataset.


Data Source History

You can copy the data source history when copying a dataset.


Clear Global Access Sign-off

You can clear global access sign-off when copying a dataset.


Selected Components

You can select Yes and then choose specific components to copy to the new dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and the system copies all components to the new dataset.


Scrunch Temporary Differences

You can Scrunch data when creating a dataset. The Tag or Classes selected during the Scrunch process appear for informational purposes.


Copy Notes

When adding a dataset, you can select the option to copy the notes.


How to Add New (Empty) Datasets

To add an Empty new dataset:


  1. In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Datasets.

  2. Click Add to add a dataset.

  3. Type a Name.

  4. Select the dataset Type: PROV, or EST PYMT.

  5. Select a Fiscal Year from the list.

  6. Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.

  7. Type a Group Rate %.

  8. If required by your administrator, type a Case #.

  9. Select Empty for the dataset Transaction.

  10. Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to apply a datasource to the dataset for reporting functionality.

    1. Select Tags to apply tags as the datasource for the dataset.

    2. Select Classes & Subclasses to apply classes & subclasses as the datasource for the dataset.

  11. Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and you can enter information into the dataset.


Rolling Over a Dataset

You can include the following items when rolling over dataset.


Dataset Rollover Options


Before rolling over a provision dataset to an interim dataset, remove check marks for the VA and NOL

Automation 114 options in My Datasets > Units > More > Other.


How to Rollover Datasets

To Rollover a dataset:


  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. Click Add to add a dataset.

  3. Type a Name.

  4. Select the dataset Type: PROV,or EST PYMT.

  5. Select a Fiscal Year from the list.

  6. Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.

  7. Type a Group Rate %.

  8. If required by your administrator, type the Case #.

  9. Select Rollover for the dataset Transaction.

  10. Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.

    1. If you want to apply Tags to the dataset select Tags for the rolled over dataset.

    2. If you want to apply Classes & Subclasses to the dataset select Classes & Subclasses for the rolled over dataset.

  11. Select a dataset in the Source Dataset drop-down list.

  12. Select a dataset in the Prior Period Dataset drop-down list.

  13. Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.

  14. Click Next.

  15. Choose the components in the Include from the Source Dataset dialog box that you want to include in the rolled over dataset.

    The list of components include: Sub-Consolidations, Attachments, Active Workpapers, My Reports,

    Shared Reports, Report Footnotes, Security Access, Scrunch Notes.

    398

    Temporary Differences, and Copy

  16. Click Save. A message appears asking if you want to refresh the report data.

  17. Click Yes.


Deferred Validation

The Deferred Validation information is provided by the Source Dataset and Selected Dataset. You can review all changes made to rolled over balances in the Deferred Validation tab.


To review ending and beginning unit balances for the rolled over dataset:


  1. In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Datasets.

  2. Select Deferred Validation.

  3. To sort and filter the information, select a column header within the table.

  4. A total amount appears for the Ending, Beginning and Difference columns.

  5. Click Save.


Payable Validation

The Payable Validation information is provided by the Source Dataset and Selected Dataset. You can review all changes made to rolled balances in the Payable Validation tab.


To review ending and beginning unit balances for the new rollover dataset:


  1. In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Datasets.

  2. Select Payable Validation.

  3. To sort and filter the information, select a column header within the table.

  4. A total amount appears for the Ending, Beginning and Difference columns.

  5. Click Save.


Copy Existing Datasets

When copying dataset, you can include the following items in the copied dataset: Subconsolidations, Attachments, Active Workpapers, My Reports, Shared Reports, Report Footnotes, Security Access, Data Source History, Clear Global Access Sign Off, Selected Components and Copy Notes.


Note: To exclude data entries from the source dataset during the copy process, select the subclass assigned to the specific class (up to 5). Also, you can select all classes in Class/Subclasses in Administration, within the System, Manage Configuration folder for data entry.


How to Copy Datasets

To Copy a dataset:


  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. Click Add to add a dataset.

  3. Type a Name.

  4. Select the dataset Type: PROV, EST PYMT, or ACTR.

  5. Select a Fiscal Year from the list.

  6. Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.

  7. Type a Group Rate %.

  8. If required by your administrator, type the Case #.

  9. Choose Copy for the dataset Transaction.

  10. Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to Apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.

    1. If you want Tags applied to the dataset, select Tags for the copied dataset.

    2. If you want Classes & Subclasses applied to the dataset, select Classes & Subclasses for the copied dataset.

  11. Select a dataset in the Source Dataset drop-down list.

  12. Select a dataset in the Prior Period Dataset drop-down list.

  13. Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.

  14. Click Next.

  15. Choose components in the Include from the Source Dataset dialog box that you want to include in the copied dataset.

The list of components include: Sub-Consolidations, Attachments, Active Workpapers, My Reports, Shared Reports, Report Footnotes, Security Access, Data Source History, Clear Global Access Sign Off, Copy Notes and Selected Components.


For Selected Components, clicking Yes lets you select components and then the system copies those to the new dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and and all components are copied to the new dataset.

  1. Click Yes to copy components to the new dataset.

    Selected Components


  2. Click Next.

  3. In the Copy Checked Components dialog box, select the components from the Beg Bal, Activity, Deferred, Bal Sheet and Expense lists.

  4. Clicking a header name selects all components in that column. For example, click Beg Bal and all components are selected.


    Copy Checked Components

  5. Click Save.


    Combined Datasets

    The combined datasets option takes data from separate datasets and combines that data to create a new set of data. Several configurable items and several assumptions are made by the system when combining existing datasets. Be sure to check the dataset's combined results because they may not be what you expect.


    GENERAL INFORMATION


How to Combine Datasets

To Combine Multiple Datasets:


  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. Click Add to add a dataset.

  3. Type a Name.

  4. Select the dataset Type: PROV, EST PYMT, or ACTR.

  5. Select a Fiscal Year.

  6. Select a Fiscal Period. For example, you can select FY - FY: full year.

  7. Type a Group Rate %.

  8. If required by your administrator, type the Case #.

  9. Choose Combine for the dataset Transaction.

  10. Click Tags or Classes & Subclasses to Apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.

    1. If you want Tags applied to the dataset, select Tags for the combined dataset.

    2. If you want Classes & Subclasses applied to the dataset, select Classes & Subclasses for the combined dataset.

  11. Select a dataset in the Prior Period Dataset drop-down list.

  12. Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.

  13. Click Next.

  14. Select a dataset from the Beginning Dataset drop-down list.

  15. Select the datasets that you want to combine from the list of available datasets.

  16. Select a dataset from the with Ending Rates from drop-down list.

  17. Select Security Access, if desired.

  18. Click Next and a note appears explaining how the combined datasets are calculated.

  19. Click Save.


Note: If you attempt to create a duplicate dataset, a message appears stating "A dataset or reporting dataset with the name you are updating to already exists. Please specify a unique name."



Dataset Relations

You can set up a relationship between the tax return, final provision and current provision in the Dataset Relations tab.


RTP Return: Return Dataset

RTP Provision: Provision Dataset

RTP Target: Current Provision Dataset


When this relationship is set up, the system automatically updates the Tax Provision through the calculation

and posting of RTP true-ups 716 . In order to post RTP adjustments, relate the tax return dataset to the same

or previous period RTP Provision dataset, as well as the same or future period RTP Target dataset.

How to Relate Datasets

Set up a relationship between a Return dataset, Provision dataset and Current Provision dataset. This set up is required to Post the RTP:


  1. Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. In the Actions column, select the pencil icon to open the page to edit a Return dataset.

  3. Select Dataset Relations.

  4. The application assigns the RTP Return to the selected dataset by default.

  5. Select the RTP Provision dataset to calculate a difference between the Return and Provision dataset.

  6. Select the RTP Target dataset to calculate the true-up difference.


    Note:

Post Ret-to Prov option does not appear in the list, be sure you have the Dataset Relations set up.


How to Delete Datasets

To delete a Dataset:

  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. Select a Dataset. To select multiple datasets hold the Ctrl Key and then select the datasets to delete.

  3. Click Delete.

  4. A message appears, Confirm Delete?, select Continue to delete the dataset.

  5. Click Cancel to exit the request without deleting the dataset.


    WARNING:


How to Archive Datasets

To Archive a dataset:


  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. Choose the dataset you want to archive.

  3. Click to edit the dataset.

  4. Click Yes to Archive the dataset.


    Scrunch Datasets

    You can Scrunch 398 Temporary Differences to combine the data by code and temporary difference type with

    the same rate for the following components:



Scrunch Datasets


Scrunch Process

You can sum current and non-current temporary differences with different tag letters assigned to them while rolling over a dataset.


To utilize the Scrunch Functionality:

  1. Add a new dataset and then select Rollover


    387 for the transaction type.

  2. During the rollover process, select Scrunch Temporary Differences.

  3. Follow the temporary difference rules

    398 .


    When you select Scrunch Temp Diffs, all temporary differences are included in the scrunch process.


EXAMPLE SEQUENCE

  1. Roll over a 2015 dataset to a 2016 dataset. (Leaving multiple beginning balances for each temporary difference.)

  2. Export the 2016 dataset.

  3. Apply the Scrunch macro to generate a new import spreadsheet.

  4. Create a new blank 2016 dataset.

  5. Import the scrunched spreadsheet generated by the macro into the blank 2016 dataset.


Scrunch GAAP -STAT

You can scrunch the current/non-current GAAP-STAT temporary differences. First, you must activate the GAAP-STAT Scrunch parameter. Then, during the dataset rollover and scrunch process, you can choose a Current GAAP, Current STAT, Non-Current GAAP, and Non-Current STAT class or tag for the scrunch functionality.


The tags and classes that appear in the Current GAAP and Non-Current GAAP lists are based on the tags


and classes designated as GAAP-STAT tags and classes in the Administration > Manage

Configurations > Reporting> Tax Provision

STAT and Non-Current STAT fields.

482 area. All other tags and classes populate the Current


Note: The rules of scrunch 398 described for Scrunch previously will apply to Scrunch GAAP-STAT.


How to Scrunch Datasets

To Scrunch a dataset:


  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. Click Add to add a dataset.

  3. Select Scrunch for the Transaction.

  4. Click Next.

  5. Select the items to include in the rolled over dataset.

  6. Select Scrunch Temp Diffs letters assigned to them.

  7. Click Next.

    398 to sum current and non-current temporary differences with different tag

  8. For Scrunch Temporary Differences, select a Tag or Class.

  9. Click Save.

  10. For the refresh report data message, select Yes to update the reports with the scrunched data.

    Select No if you do not wish to update the reports at this time.


    Note: A new scrunched record is created for each unique combination of the Code, C/NC designation and ending deferred rate in the source dataset. If there are multiple groups of source records that differ only by Ending Deferred Rate, then the system will generate a unique numeric value to use as the record’s subclass. This system-generated subclass will distinguish one like record from other similar records and will allow the system to create as many scrunch records as needed per the number of unique ending rates in the source dataset.

    For example, a source dataset may have 4 temporary difference records all sharing the same Code and C/ NC designation, but two records have identical overridden ending deferred rates and two records have not overridden the ending rate. In this case, two scrunched records are created, one for the two records that have identical overridden rates and one for the two that have not overridden the rates. The first record will be created with the default subclass of the class chosen in the wizard and the second will be created with the same class as the first record but with a system-generated numeric subclass, for example, “1”. The system will increment the numeric subclass for each record it needs to create for the same unique Code and C/NC.

    This system-generated subclass will not be visible to Administrators in the Administration and cannot be modified.



    To set up tags and classes for the scrunch functionality:


Dataset Details

Use the grid to review the Analysis Datasets Name, Status, Fiscal Year, Fiscal Period and Type.


How to Add Analysis Datasets

To add datasets to Analysis:

  1. In Administration, click Manage Datasets and then Analysis Datasets.

  2. In All Datasets, select a Dataset. To add multiple datasets, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the datasets.

  3. Click the right arrow to assign the datasets. The dataset(s) will move to the Available Analysis Datasets list.

  4. Click Save.


To remove the Datasets:

  1. Select a dataset in Available Analysis Datasets.

  2. Click the left arrow to remove the dataset.

  3. Click Save.


To Filter the dataset details:

  1. Click the header row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Filter.


To remove the Filter:

  1. Click the header row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Clear.

Note: Select Change View to switch the view from the Horizontal view to the Vertical view and vice versa.



Reporting Datasets

In Administration > Manage Datasets > Reporting Datasets use Reporting Datasets to combine multiple datasets into a single dataset view for reporting.


There are two types of reporting datasets: Sequential

404 and Additive

405 .

How to Add Reporting Datasets

To add a Sequential or Additive Reporting Dataset:

  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Reporting Datasets.

  2. Type a name for Reporting Datasets. This name must be unique and cannot be the same as a Dataset name.

  3. For Type, select Sequential or Additive.

  4. Click Add.

  5. In the Reporting Dataset Name list, choose the Reporting Dataset. The reporting dataset will then be highlighted.

  6. Select the appropriate datasets in the Datasets Represented in Reporting Datasets drop-down list.

  7. Click Add.

  8. To view the Reporting Dataset, select My Datasets. The Sequential or Additive Reporting Dataset

will appear in the All Datasets tab. The Type appears as Seq or Add.


You can add the Reporting dataset in All Datasets to My Review List.

  1. Click Review for the Sequential or Additive Reporting Dataset in My Datasets. The Review & Edit page opens.

  2. Click Reporting to select a report to view the data.


    Interim Datasets

    Interim Datasets are another type of dataset used in the Tax Provision application. Interim Datasets calculate the interim tax provision based on the annualized effective tax rate. When you create an Interim dataset two datasets appear in My Datasets.


To Create a New Interim Dataset:

  1. In Administration > Manage Datasets > Interim Datasets.

  2. Click Create New.

  3. Type a Name.

  4. Select the Interim Approach from the drop-down list. Click YTD Basis or Isolated Basis. There are two Interim Approaches available when creating Interim Datasets.

    1. YTD (Year to Date) Basis creates a copy of the previous quarter and advances the data to the next quarter. The YTD Basis time period is a continuum. When the current dataset is advanced to the next period, (instead of seeing an isolated subset of data) YTD Basis will be built of the Actual data.

    2. Isolated Basis lets the application advance from Period Type to Period. The Isolated Basis takes the ending balances in the current dataset and populates the beginning balances of the next period Actual dataset.

  1. Type a Group Rate %.

  2. Click Classes or Tags to apply the reporting functionality for the dataset.

    1. If you want Tags applied to the dataset select Tags for the dataset.

    2. If you want Classes & Subclasses applied to the dataset select Classes & Subclasses for the dataset.

  3. For Interim Rate Basis, you can choose Overall or Unit by Unit.

  4. If you select Unit by Unit, in the True-Up drop-down list, select a true-up unit.

  5. In the Fiscal Year drop-down list, select a year.

  6. In the Period Type drop-down list, select a period. You can choose between Quarters, Months and Periods.

  7. In the # of Periods drop-down list, select the number of periods.

  8. Click Save New.

  9. Select one of the following options: Empty dataset, Copy existing dataset or Roll over from existing dataset.

    Three options are available when creating an interim dataset.

    1. Empty Dataset - Creates an empty interim dataset that does not contain any data.

    2. Copy existing Dataset - Copies an existing interim dataset.

    3. Roll over from existing dataset - An existing provision dataset can be rolled over to a sequential period so that the ending balance and rates in the provision dataset become the beginning balances and rates in the new interim dataset. Before rolling over a provision dataset to an interim dataset, be sure to turn off the VA and NOL Automation.

  10. Select Yes, if the dataset is a Read Only dataset. Otherwise, the default is No and information can be entered into the dataset.


Interim Approach

There are two Interim Approaches available when creating Interim Datasets. Selecting the dataset designation approach enables the application to advance from Period Type to Period Type and maintain an Isolated Basis approach or build a YTD Basis (Year to Date) approach.


Isolated Basis

Selecting the Isolated Basis approach, creates a copy of the previous quarter and rolls over the data to the next quarter. The Isolated Basis takes the ending balances in the current dataset and populates the beginning balances of the next period Actual dataset.


YTD Basis

Selecting the YTD Basis approach, creates a copy of the previous quarter and advances the data to the next quarter. The YTD Basis time period is a continuum. When the current dataset is advanced to the next period, (instead of seeing an isolated subset of data) YTD Basis will be built of the Actual data.


Period Type

You can set up the Period Type for Quarters, Months or open ended Periods without putting a time constraint on it.

Isolated Basis Dataset, Period Type Months

Select Advance to M2 for Month 2 and all ending balances in Month 1 Actual become the beginning balances for Month 2 Actual.


YTD (Year to Date) Dataset, Quarters

You can select Advance to Q2 for Quarter 2 and beginning balances do not change and remain consistent from Quarter to Quarter.


# of Periods

You can select anywhere from 1 to 15 periods to associate with the Period Type. There is no limitation, you can choose any number of periods for a Period Type.

In an existing interim dataset, the name, interim rate basis, group rate, and read-only status can be modified. The data for all quarters worth of forecasted and actual data in the interim dataset can be exported and imported into this area. You can access the Import and Export buttons at the bottom of the screen. Interim data utilizes this import and export functionality. You will not use the export/import categories spreadsheet.


Important: When deleting an interim dataset be aware that the data cannot be restored. Consider exporting the interim dataset data before deleting the dataset in case the data needs to be restored to another dataset.



Dataset Name


To add Datasets for Global Access

1. Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Manage Active Datasets.

  1. Select a Dataset and then a Column Type.

  2. Enter a name for the Column Header to appear in Global Access.

  3. Click Add.

  4. To change the order of the dataset list, click Up and Down.

  5. To change the dataset information, click Update.

  6. To remove an active dataset from the dataset list, click Delete.


Manage Active Datasets


Active Workpaper Mapping

When rolling over or copying a dataset, you can select to rollover/copy Active Workpapers. You can rollover/ copy the Active Workpaper Mapping in two ways.

  1. As part of the dataset rollover/copy process.

  2. Independent from the dataset rollover process.


    Active Workpaper Mapping


    DATASET ROLLOVER/COPY - ACTIVE WORKPAPER MAPPING

    You have the option to choose Active Workpapers, as part of the dataset rollover and copy process. This lets the system rollover/copy the active workpapers when you rollover/copy the dataset.


    To rollover or copy the Active Workpapers Mapping:


Rollover/Copy Mapping to New Dataset


If you do not have user permissions to create a workpaper, you cannot rollover or copy the Active Workpapers mapping in ONESOURCE Tax Provision.

The option for Active Workpapers is set to No and is unavailable. Using your mouse, point to and click the ToolTip, and a message lets you know if you need permissions granted.


See User Permissions 465 for more information about ONESOURCE user permissions.


Active Workpapers ToolTip


ADD NEW DATASET

In Workpaper Name, you can see all workpapers attributed to the source dataset and change the mappings to a new dataset.


  1. In Add New Dataset, select a New Dataset from the drop-down list.

  2. Click Next.


Add New Dataset


SAVE WORKPAPER

You can save the workpaper by renaming the workpaper and saving it to the existing folder or save the workpaper to a new folder. If you do not have permissions to create a folder the option, Add Folder, is unavailable.


To add a new dataset,


  1. In Workpaper Name, type the workpaper name.

  2. In Select Folder, select a folder in the drop-down list.

  3. Click Add Folder to save the workpaper to a new folder.


    Active Workpapers


  4. Type the Folder Name.

  5. Click Save.


    Add Folder


    Notes:

  6. Type the Folder Name.

  7. Click Save.


    Add Folder


    Notes:


Administration - Manage Units - Code


Unit Sub-Consolidations

In Administration > Manage Units > Unit Sub-Consolidations you can create and maintain sub- consolidations.

To add a new Sub-Consolidation:

  1. Type a Code and Display Name.

  2. Click the Display Name same as Code option for the display name and code to be the same.

  3. Click the Sub-Tier of option and select a dataset that you want the sub-consolidation to be a sub-tier of.

After you have created your sub-consolidations, assign them to units

420 and datasets

421 .


To import a new Sub-Consolidation, complete the appropriate fields on the #CSC# SubConsolidations sheet in the Import Categories template.

The #CSC# worksheet lets you:

  1. Create sub-consolidations.

  2. Define the relationship between Tier 1 and Tier 2 sub-consolidations.

  3. Assign sub-consolidations to datasets.

Additionally, you can create a sheet named #CSC2#, which lets you create and populate multiple sub- consolidations for a unit. Column A will have the Unit Code and Columns B through IV will have the CSCs in which the unit is included.

The #CSC2# worksheet assigns sub-consolidations to units.

  1. For Unit Code column, enter the unit code.

  2. For the SubConsol Assignment enter the Name (Display Name).

    Existing unit designation in a CSC is replaced, not appended, when the #CSC2# is imported. This sheet does not export when categories are exported and is not in the standard template for import categories.


    Description

    The name is user-defined and can be any combination of alpha and numeric characters, including spaces, up to 60 characters.


Note: To see your Sub-Consolidations in the Review & Edit page, you must add the dataset to My Review List in My Datasets.



Assign Units to Sub-Consolidations

Sub-Consolidation Members

UNITS

You assign units to Sub-Consolidations for reviewing data in the Review & Edit pages To assign a unit to a Sub-Consolidation:

  1. Select the unit in Available Units.

  2. Click the right arrow to add the unit to Assigned Units.


    For the Available Units listed, you can filter, select, and assign units to a sub-consolidation. You can filter Available Units by:


Assign Datasets to Sub-Consolidations

Sub-Consolidation Members

DATASETS

You assign datasets to Sub-Consolidations for reviewing data in the Review & Edit pages. To assign the Datasets to a Sub-Consolidation:

  1. Select the dataset in Available Datasets.

  2. Click the right arrow to add the dataset to Assigned Datasets.


    Note: Assigning Sub-Consolidations to datasets lets you have better control of Read-Only datasets.



    For the Available Datasets listed, you can filter, select, and assign datasets to a sub-consolidation. You can filter Available Datasets by:


Pre-Tax Book Income

In Administration > Manage Units you can create Pre-Tax Book Income lines for entering data. To add a Pre-Tax Book Income line item:

  1. Select Administration > Manage Units.

  2. Select Add and then type the Code and Name.


    To import a new Pre-Tax Book Income, complete the appropriate fields on the #PTBI# Pre-Tax Book Income sheet in the Import Categories template.


    Code and Name


Manage Pre-Tax Book Income


Permanent Differences

In Administration > Manage Units > Permanent Differences you can create Permanent Differences for entering data.

To add Permanent Differences:

  1. Select Administration > Manage Units.

  2. Select Add and then type the Code and Name.

  3. Select None, All, or Custom for the Included for State option.


    To import a new Permanent Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CPD# Permanent Differences sheet in the Import Categories template.


    Code and Name


Included for State

Determine if the permanent difference federal values will be included for state 25


None

0% flows from the Federal to the States.


All

100% flows from the Federal to the States.


Custom


calculations.

You can use Custom to add custom allocations on a state by state basis and abide by specific state rules.


Note: The default conditions setup at the administration level can be modified at the dataset level. This lets you preserve prior datasets at the 0% or 100% settings with manual entries. This also lets datasets going forward have different % applied on a state by state basis.


Manage Permanent Differences


Temporary Differences

In Administration > Manage Units > Temporary Differences you can create Temporary Differences for entering data.

To add Temporary Differences:

  1. Select Administration > Manage Units.

  2. Select Add and then type the Code and Name.

  3. Select None, All, or Custom for the Included for State option.

  4. Select NC- Non-Current or C-Current for the Default Type option.


    To import a new Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CTD# Temporary Differences sheet in the Import Categories template.


    Code and Name


Included for State

Determine if the temporary difference federal values will be included for state


None

0% flows from the Federal to the States.


All

100% flows from the Federal to the States.


Custom


25 calculations.

You can use Custom to add custom allocations on a state by state basis and abide by specific state rules.



Notes:

By default, the Default Type is set to NC-Non-Current. To change the Default Type going forward, you can manually update or export the Categories, update to the proper types and then import them.

The default conditions setup at administration level may be modified at the dataset level. This allows prior datasets to be preserved at the 0% or 100% settings with manual entries. This also allows datasets going forward to have different % applied on a state by state basis.

The administrator has the ability in Manage Configurations to designate a Default Type of C-Current / N-Non- Current to a Temporary Difference. Also, the administrator may disable the drop-down list so that only the Default Type is available. Because there are cases when the Current / Non-Current default type is overwritten, the Default Type can be set up by the administrator to be overridden for any line item.

See your Administrator if you have questions about the Default Type set up in the system.


Manage Temporary Differences


NOL Temporary Differences

In Administration > Manage Units > NOL Temporary Differences you can create NOL Temporary Differences for entering data.

To add NOL Temporary Differences:

  1. Select Administration > Manage Units.

  2. Select Add and then type the Code and Name.

  3. Select NC- Non-Current or C-Current for the Default Type option.


    To import a new NOL Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields in the #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs sheet in the Import Categories template.


    Code and Name


Manage NOL Temporary Differences


After Tax Temporary Differences

In Administration > Manage Units > After Tax Temporary Differences you can create After Tax Temporary Differences for entering data.


To add After Tax Temporary Differences:

  1. Select Administration > Manage Units.

  2. Select Add and then type the Code and Name.

  3. Select NC- Non-Current or C-Current for the Default Type option.


    To import a new After Tax Temporary Difference, complete the appropriate fields on the #CATTD# AfterTax TempDiffs sheet in the Import Categories template.


    Code and Name


Manage After - Tax Temporary Differences


Tax Adjustments

In Administration > Manage Units > Tax Adjustments you can create Tax Adjustments for entering data. To add Tax Adjustments:

  1. Select Administration > Manage Units.

  2. Select Add and then type the Code and Name.


    To import a new Tax Adjustment, complete the appropriate fields on the #CTA# Tax Adjustments sheet in the Import Categories template.


    Code and Name


Manage Tax Adjustments


Intercompany Transactions

In Administration > Manage Units > InterCompany Transactions you can create InterCompany Transactions for entering data.

To add InterCompany Transactions:

  1. Select Administration > Manage Units.

  2. Select Add and then type the Code and Name.

  3. Select the State Paying Entity and State Receiving Entity options, if needed.


    To import a new InterCompany Transaction, complete the appropriate fields on the #ICOTXNT# Inter Co Txn Types sheet in the Import Categories template.


    Code and Name


435


435


Tax Return Mappings

Use the Tax Basis/Return Mapping lines to map book/tax differences to the Tax Basis Balance Sheet


298 ,

the Tax Basis Income Statement 300, and the tax return compliance software. Set up your accounts in

Manage Trial Balance to create a Tax Basis Balance Sheet. Then, modify existing Tax Basis/Return mappings as needed.


In My Datasets > More > Tax Basis Mapping, use Tax Basis/Return Mapping 82 to perform dataset-level

mapping. You define the mapping for the Tax Basis Balance Sheet in a Provision dataset. The temporary differences are layered onto the Trial Balance Sublines. The Difference drop-down list shows the Permanent and Temporary Differences in Administration. The Debit and Credit columns show the Trial Balance Sublines

431 created in Manage Trial Balance

430.


Important: At the Dataset level, you are required to designate two sub-line accounts vs. one at the Administration area. Therefore, you must complete the following conversion if the mappings were set up in administration for Manage Trial Balance Mappings.

  1. Complete the appropriate fields on the #MBAL# Map Balance Sheet and #MINC# Map Income Statement sheet in the Import Return Maps template.

  2. Export the dataset.

  3. Copy the data from the #MBAL# Map Balance Sheet sheet to the #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping sheet in the Import Numbers template.

  4. Add the required data to the #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping sheet.

  5. Save and import the #TBM# Tax Basis Mapping sheet.



    INCOME SHEET


LOCK SELECTED CLASS

Select the Lock Selected Class to prevent a user from deleting, changing the name, or removing assignments. A lock icon appears next to the class.


DEFAULT

Select Default to select the default class and subclass.


HORIZONTAL & VERTICAL VIEW

Click Horizontal or Vertical to change the view from Horizontal to Vertical, if desired.


EXPANDED & CONTRACTED VIEW

When expanded, you can view the entire list of Classes and Subclasses.

  1. Click for a Class to view the Subclass.


  2. Click for the Subclass to view the Subclass Description.


    DATA ENTRY

    Data Entry classes and subclasses are User-Defined. These classes & subclasses are assigned to tax adjustments by an administrator. The system classes are assigned to user groups.


    DEFAULT CLASS


NEW CLASSES & SUBCLASSES

The class identifies each line entered in the originating source. To add Classes & Subclasses:

  1. Select Administration and then Manage Data Options.

  2. Click Classes/Subclasses and then one of the classes. For example, click Data Entry.


  3. Click to add a New Class/Subclass and then type the New Class Code. By default Display Name same as Code is selected.

  4. Click Display Name same as Code to remove the option.

  5. Type the Display Name.

  6. Click Sub-Tier of and then Class. For example, click Default, GL Automation, or Pre-Tax Book Income.

  7. Click OK.


EDIT CLASSES & SUBCLASSES

To edit a Classes & Subclasses:

  1. Select the Class/Subclass and then Edit.

  2. Click Edit Class/Subclass.

  3. Type the New Class Name.

  4. Click OK.


DELETE CLASSES & SUBCLASSES

To delete a Classes & Subclasses:

  1. Select the Class/Subclass and then click Delete. A message appears Are you sure you want to delete the selected item(s)?.

  2. Click Cancel to close without deleting the class/subclass.

  3. Click OK to delete.


    User Groups

    AVAILABLE USER GROUPS


    You assign Available User Groups to Classes/Subclasses.


To assign User Groups to Classes & Subclasses:

  1. Select the Class/Subclass.

  2. In Available User Groups, select a User Group and then click the arrow to assign the user group. The User Group is moved to the Assigned User Groups list.

  3. To add multiple user groups to classes/subclasses, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the User Group.

  4. Click the arrow to assign the user groups.

  5. Click Save.


    Datasets

    AVAILABLE DATASETS


    You assign Available Datasets to Classes/Subclasses.


To assign Datasets to Classes & Subclasses:

  1. Select the Class/Subclass.

  2. In Available Datasets, select a Dataset and then click the arrow to assign the dataset. The Dataset is moved to the Assigned Datasets list.

  3. To add multiple datasets to classes/subclasses, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the Dataset.

  4. Click the arrow to assign the datasets.

  5. Click Save.


    Note: When you Copy or Rollover a dataset all classes appear in the new dataset.



    Component Types

    AVAILABLE COMPONENT TYPES


    When using classes, only the selected columns are available in the Data Entry pages. When you select Post to Ending Balance, the variance between Beginning and Ending Balance is posted to the selected column for Temp Diffs - Book/Tax Basis only.

    The Available Component Types are assigned to the Classes/Subclasses.


To assign Component Types to Classes & Subclasses:

  1. Select the Class/Subclass.

  2. In Available Component Types, select a Component Type and then click the arrow to assign the component type. The Component Type is moved to the Assigned Component Type list.

  3. To Post the Ending Balances, select the Assigned Component.

  4. To add multiple component types to classes/subclasses, hold down the Ctrl key and then select the Component Type.

  5. Click the arrow to assign the component types.

  6. Click Save.


    Manage Tags

    In Administration > Manage Data Options > Manage Tags you can create tag letters


540


Manage Global Access Components

In Administration > Manage Global Access Components > you can add components in Global Access for a unit.


Using an Import template, complete the appropriate fields on the #CUNC# Manage Global Access Components sheet in the Import Categories template. The Unit Code and the Component Type Code


755

must be entered for each related component 23 code. The action codes: G = Grant, D = Deny.


To add components:

  1. From the Unit List, select a Unit.

  2. For the Component Types, select the Component.

  3. For Member?, select the Components.

    1. To select all components listed, click Check All.

    2. To de-select all components listed, click Uncheck All.

    3. Click Toggle All to toggle between the Check All and the Uncheck All for all lists. You can select Copy from Unit to copy components from another unit.

To copy components from another unit:

  1. Select a unit in the Unit List.

  2. Select the component type in the Component Types list.

  3. Select a unit in the Copy from Unit list and then click Copy from Unit.


    Manage Users

    In Administration > Manage Users you can create and manage your user's information.


To edit the Users information:

  1. Click Edit.

  2. Type the Name.

  3. Type the User ID.

  4. Select the Role.

  5. Type the Phone number.

  6. Type the Email address.

  7. Select the user to Copy access from information.

  8. Click the User Status to make the user Active or InActive.

  9. Type Notes, if needed.

  10. Click Save.


To search and filter the Users list:

  1. At the bottom of the Users list, Type the keyword.

  2. Click Search.


Units

The Available Units and Assigned Units for a selected user appear on the Units page. You can assign and remove units for a user to maintain the users access to units. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.


To assign the Units:

  1. Select the unit in Available Units.

  2. Click the arrow to add the unit to Assigned Units.

  3. Click Save.


To remove the Units:

  1. Select the unit in Assigned Units.

  2. Click the arrow to remove the unit.

  3. Click Save.


    UNIT DETAILS

    The following Unit Details allow you to view the properties of the unit.


To Filter the unit details:

  1. Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Filter.


To remove the Filter:

  1. Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the Arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Clear.


Sub-Consolidations

The Available Sub-Consolidations and Assigned Sub-Consolidations for a selected user appear on the Sub- Consolidations page. You can assign and remove sub-consolidations for a user to maintain the users access to sub-consolidations. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.


To assign the Sub-Consolidations:

  1. Select the sub-consolidations in Available SubConsolidations.

  2. Click the arrow to add the sub-consolidations to Assigned SubConsolidations.

  3. Click Save.


To remove the Sub-Consolidations:

  1. Select the sub-consolidations in Assigned Sub-Consolidations.

  2. Click the arrow to remove the sub-consolidations.

  3. Click Save.


    DATASET DETAILS

    The following Sub-Consolidations Details allow you to view the properties of the sub-consolidations.


To Filter the sub-consolidations details:

  1. Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Filter.


To remove the Filter:

  1. Click the Header Row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Clear.


Global Access Sign Off

Role

A user's access to units is based on the selected Role for the units. For example, if you assign a user to a unit at the Preparer level and not the Reviewer level then, the user can access the unit only as a preparer.


To select user Role(s) for units:

  1. Click Preparer to assign the preparer role to units.

  2. Click Reviewer (Reviewer 1-6) to assign the reviewer role to units.

  3. Click Save.


The Available Units and Assigned Units for a selected user appear on the Units page. Assign and remove units for a user to maintain the Users access to units.

To assign the Units:

  1. Select the unit in Available Units.

  2. Click the arrow to add the unit to Assigned Units.

  3. Click Save.


To remove the Units:

  1. Select the unit in Assigned Units.

  2. Click the arrow to remove the unit.

  3. Click Save.


    User Roles

    In Administration > System > Manage Users > Users Roles you can set up the user role permissions. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.


You can manually add roles or use the import process to add the additional User Roles. To import User Roles, update the #CUSRRP# tab within your categories import spreadsheet file.

To Sort the details:

  1. Click the header row.

  2. Click the arrow in the column header.


To Filter the details:

  1. Click the header row.

  2. Click the arrow for the column heading and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Filter.


To remove the Filter:

  1. Click the header row for the heading you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Clear.


ADD ROLES

To Add Roles

  1. In Administration >System > Manage Users > User Roles.


  2. Click the to add a New User Role.

  3. Type the Name.

  4. Click OK.

Members

The Available Users and Assigned Users for a selected role appear on the Members page. You assign and remove users in a role to maintain the user role members.


To assign the Users:

  1. Select the user in Available Users.

  2. Click the arrow to add the user to Assigned Users.

  3. Click Save.


To remove the Users:

  1. Select the user in Assigned Users.

  2. Click the arrow to remove the user.

  3. Click Save.


Note: Users cannot be assigned to multiple roles and you must decide one role to assign each user.



Datasets

The Available Datasets and Assigned Datasets for a selected user appear on the Datasets page. You can assign and remove datasets for a user to maintain the users access to datasets. For viewing purposes, you can change the page view by selecting Horizontal or Vertical from the drop-down list in the top right corner.


To assign the Datasets:

  1. Select the dataset in Available Datasets.

  2. Click the arrow to add the unit to Assigned Datasets.

  3. Click Save.


To remove the Datasets:

  1. Select the dataset in Assigned Datasets.

  2. Click the arrow to remove the unit.

  3. Click Save.


    DATASET DETAILS

    The following Dataset Details allow you to view the properties of the dataset.


To Filter the dataset details:

  1. Click the header row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Filter.


To remove the Filter:

  1. Click the header row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Clear.


    Permissions

    The Read Only and Read/Write user role permissions are assigned to the Access Area for My Datasets, Review & Edit, Reporting, Analysis, Administration, and Global Access.


    PERMISSION DETAILS


To assign Permissions to a user role:

  1. Select a Role and then Permissions.


  2. Click to expand the Access Area.

  3. Click the arrow and drill down to the Access Areas.

  4. To assign permissions to all areas, click Read or Read/Read Write in the header.

  5. To assign each Access Area, click Read or Read/Read Write for that area.

  6. Select the minus sign to collapse the Access Area.

  7. Click Save.


Unassigned Permissions for a user group:

If Read or Read/Read Write permissions are not assigned to users for an access area, that area will not appear for users to see in the application.


Classes

The Available Classes and Assigned Classes for a selected role appear on the Classes page. You can assign and remove classes in a to maintain the user role classes.


To assign Classes to a role:

  1. Select the Code Name in Available Classes.

  2. Click the arrow to add the user to Assigned Classes.

  3. Click Save.


To remove Classes from a role:

  1. Select the Code Name in Assigned Users.

  2. Click the arrow to remove the user.

  3. Click Save.


To Filter the dataset details:

  1. Click the header row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Filter.


To remove the Filter:

  1. Click the header row for the column you want to filter.

  2. Click the arrow and then select the filter criteria.

  3. Click Clear.


Manage Global Attachments

In Administration > System > Global Attachments you can upload style sheets and other system files that have various purposes within the system. Once a file is uploaded, it deploys to all users who have access to the system.


Note: You must activate the GLOBAL_XSL system parameter


534

to see this page in Administration >

System. You can import the system parameter or contact support for assistance.



CODE

If the file being uploaded relates to a style sheet, then the code must match the code given for the report. When you are given the file from the system, you are provided with this code.


FILE

Click Browse to locate the file. Once you select Add or Update, the file is stored in the database. Any future changes to the system do not affect the style sheet being used by the system.


DESCRIPTION

Enter a description of the file being uploaded.


Notes:


NEW DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

To add a Deferred Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Add and then type the Name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.


EDIT DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

To edit a Deferred Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Edit and then type the new Name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.


DELETE DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

To delete a Deferred Rollforward Column:

  1. Select a Deferred Rollforward Column.

  2. Select Delete and the message appears "All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to."

  3. Select the Deferred Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.

  4. Click Cancel to close without deleting the Deferred Rollforward Column.


    COPY DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

    There is not an option to copy the Deferred Rollforward Column at this time.


    ASSIGN DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

    To assign the Deferred Rollforward Column Value to the Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:


To assign a class to the column for Activity, Deferred, or Balance Sheet Only:

  1. For each Class Code - Name, select the Deferred Rollforward column for Activity, Deferred, or a

    Balance Sheet Only tax adjustment.

  2. Click Save.


Deferred Rollforward Assignment Summary

ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY

The Assignment Summary page lists the column name and the assigned classes.


DEFERRED ROLLFORWARD COLUMN NAME

The column name assigned to classes.


CLASS

A list of available classes.


CLASS TYPE


CLASSES

The types of classes available:

  1. AUTO- System Automation

  2. Bridge - Bridge

  3. DEF -Default

  4. EstimPay - ONESOURCE Estimated Payments

  5. FT - Flow Through

  6. FTE - Flow Through Clearing

  7. FTP - Flow Through Posting

  8. IncTax - ONESOURCE Income Tax

  9. RTP- Return to Provision

  10. StateApp - ONESOURCE State Apportionment

  11. UPTBI - Pre-Tax Book Income

  12. XFR - Transfer


    DATA ENTRY COLUMN

    The column the entry will appear in the Deferred Rollforward report.


    Manage NOL Rollforwards

    In Administration > System > Manage NOL Rollforwards you can create and manage NOL Rollforwards. You can set up the deferred columns by Tags or by Classes & Subclasses.


NEW NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

To add a NOL Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Add and then type the Name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.


EDIT NOL COLUMN

To edit a NOL Rollforward Column:

  1. Select Edit and then type the new Name.

  2. Click Default, to attach the default subclass.


DELETE NOL COLUMN

To delete a NOL Rollforward Column:

  1. Select a NOL Rollforward Column.

  2. Select Delete and the message appears "All assigned classes from deleted column will be re- assigned to."

  3. Select the NOL Rollforward Column to re-assign the classes.

  4. Click Cancel to close without deleting the NOL Rollforward Column.


    COPY NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

    There is not an option to copy the NOL Rollforward Column at this time.


    ASSIGN NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMNS

    To assign the NOL Rollforward Column Value to the Class to be Displayed in the Deferred Report:


To assign a class to the column for Activity, Deferred, or Balance Sheet Only:

  1. For each Class Code - Name, select the NOL Rollforward column for Activity, Deferred, or a

    Balance Sheet Only tax adjustment.

  2. Click Save.


NOL Rollforward Assignment Summary

ASSIGNMENT SUMMARY

The Assignment Summary page lists the column name and the assigned classes.


NOL ROLLFORWARD COLUMN NAME

The column name assigned to classes.


CLASS

A list of available classes.


CLASS TYPE

The types of classes available:

  1. AUTO- System Automation

  2. Bridge - Bridge

  3. DEF -Default

  4. EstimPay - ONESOURCE Estimated Payments

  5. FT - Flow Through

  6. FTE - Flow Through Clearing

  7. FTP - Flow Through Posting

  8. IncTax - ONESOURCE Income Tax

  9. RTP- Return to Provision

  10. StateApp - ONESOURCE State Apportionment

  11. UPTBI - Pre-Tax Book Income

  12. XFR - Transfer


    DATA ENTRY COLUMN

    The column the entry will appear on the Deferred Rollforward report.


    Manage IFRS Rollforwards

    In Administration > System > Manage IFRS Rollforwards you can create and Manage IFRS Rollforwards. You can set up the deferred columns by Tags.



Manage Licenses

Some features of ONESOURCE Tax Provision, including, Flow-Through, and Journal Entries, require an additional license.


In Administration > System > Manage Licenses you can add the license code and license key.


FEATURE CODE

Type the name of the license, for example, FlowThrough.


FEATURE KEY

Type the key for the license.


Note: Upon saving the feature code and key, the feature is activated and the check icon appears in the Valid? column.



Manage Licenses


Manage Configurations

In Administration > System > Manage Configurations an Administrator can activate additional functionality within the application. The administrator will activate parameters to configure the application.


From the list of tabs, you can select Reporting, Advanced Functionality, Integration, Data Entry, Global Access or Admin to access parameters. The parameters are organized within tabs and represent specific functions of the application. The parameters are activated by selecting Yes or Add for the parameter option.


Initially, some parameters appear unavailable because the parameter is not activated. Once a parameter is selected, it is activated and appears in blue font to reflect the change. The parameter will change back to black font the next time you access Manage Configurations.


For information about a parameter:


To select parameter in Manage Configurations:

  1. Select Administration > System > Manage Configurations and then select the page with the functionality to activate.

  2. Select the parameter to activate it.


    Manage Configurations


    Reporting

    In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting you can find the following topics.


Note: On the Consolidated and Sub-Consolidated levels, the default view, excel breakout (states), changes to breakout (by Unit, States). The breakout (sub consolidated by State) view displays the detail by consolidated state. The report view (on the sub-consolidated level report) will show each state column with the unit data grouped into their CSC setup.



ADD EXPECTED DEFERRED REPORT

Select Yes, to activate the Expected Deferred report which displays each State's Ending Apportionment Rate, Ending Statutory Rate and the two combined to make the Expected Deferred Rate on a unit by unit basis. This report displays the state ending deferred rate (ending statutory rate) and ending apportionment rate.


ADD STATE TAX PROV RPT BREAKOUT REPORT

Select Yes, to activate the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout report which displays the State Tax Provision broken out by State and Unit. This report has been enhanced with additional functionality and it can be displayed be viewing the State Summary/Provision Summary in the Breakout (by Unit/States) view.


LIMIT STATES ON STATE TAX PROV RPT BREAKOUT

Select Yes, to choose a single State to filter the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout Report to show that state.


LIMIT UNITS ON STATE TAX PROV RPT BREAKOUT

Select Yes, to choose a single Unit to filter the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout Report to show that unit.


HIDE STATE REPORT MENU WHEN NO STATES?

This option will hide the state report menu items if no states are activated in the dataset. Select Yes, to hide the menu items. Select No, to have the menu items always visible.


HIDE STATE REPORT DETAILS WHEN NO STATES?

This option will cause state details to be hidden on reports if there are no states activated in the dataset.


Select Yes, to hide the menu items. Select No, to have the menu items always visible.


Formatting

In the Formatting tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.


Note: Both the header and footer can have up to 65 characters. The following parameters and descriptions include:

ADD REPORT HEADER

Text entered (up to 200 characters) will display as a Header on all reports when they are printed.


ADD REPORT FOOTER

Text entered (up to 200 characters) will display as a Footer on all reports when they are printed.


SET PRINT PAGES WIDE

Enter the number of pages wide that reports should print to. If no amount is entered the reports will shrink to fit into one page.


CLIENT NAME IN REPORTS

Allows the text entered (up to 200 characters) will display in the header of reports and will replace the name from the license file.


REPORTING CURRENCY FOR NAME IN REPORT HEADERS (UP TO 65 CHARACTERS)

When viewing in reporting currency, this parameter allows the text entered to appear in the header of the reports in parentheses after the report name.


TREAT CODES AS TEXT IN EXCEL

Select Yes, to convert any user defined codes that have numbers into text when they are exported to Excel. This preserves leading zeros or where a code resembles a scientific notation instead of converting them where the leading zero is dropped (e.g. 005335A to 55335A) or the formula is converted (e.g. 77E.00001 to 7.7).


EXTENSION OF CLIENT NAME IN REPORTS

The text entered will be displayed as an extension of the 'Client Name in Reports' parameter value and will be displayed in the header of reports. Enter the Client Name that you want to appear on the reports.


NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES FOR RATES

Select the number of decimal places to be displayed for rates as they are displayed on reports.


NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES FOR FX RATES

Select the number of decimal places to be displayed for FX rates as they are displayed on reports.


USE PARENTHESIS FOR NEGATIVE NUMBERS

Select Yes, to display negative numbers using parenthesis (e.g. -1000 to (1,000)). This parameter allows the balances in the application to appear with parenthesis rather than negative numbers to better support the accounting format.


Report settings can be added in the Report Settings tab of the Manage Configurations screen in the System folder, in Administration. You can set the default view for the Tax Provision, Effective Tax Rate, and Deferred


Balances reports.


APIC Pool

In the APIC Pool tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.


The following is the parameter and description:


APIC POOL DATA ENTRY + REPORT

Select Yes, to activate the APIC Pool Data Entry and the APIC Pool report which allows the movement in the Additional Paid In Capital Pool to be tracked.

Other

In the Other tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the page.

The following are the parameters and description:

REMOVE SEQUENTIAL RDS CONSTRAINTS

Select Yes, to remove the sequential reporting datasets check and allows the reporting dataset to exist where the ending balances and rates in the first dataset do not have to agree with the beginning balances and rates in the next dataset.


ALLOW MULTIPLE LOCAL CURRENCIES ON REPORTS

Select Yes, to remove the restriction when the underlying units have differing local currencies to allow data to display (on the consolidated and sub-consolidated level reports) in Local Currency.


ENABLE PAYABLE SUMMARY ENTRY

Select Yes to activate the Payable Settings and Payable Summary Entry data entry screens.


NUMBER OF CUSTOM TABS TO DISPLAY

Select 1 or 2 to determine if the Payable Summary entry will have 1 or 2 Custom Tabs.


CUSTOM TAB NAME 1

The text entered is the Custom Tab Name 1 for the Payable Summary data entry screen.


CUSTOM TAB NAME 2

The text entered is the Custom Tab Name 2 for the Payable Summary data entry screen.


ENABLE RECLASS TAB

Select Yes - Items entered on the Reclass tab can only be saved when the Amount Total nets to zero for items on the page.


RECLASS TAB NAME

When the Reclass Tab is enabled, the text entered will rename the Reclass Tab for Payable Summary Entry.


TRANSFER PAYABLE TRANSACTION TYPE

Select the default value from the list for the Payable Transaction Type in Transfer In and Out for the source and target units.


Alternative Minimum Tax

In the Alternative Minimum Tax tab, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.


The following parameters and descriptions include:

DISABLE THE AMT AUTOMATION FEATURE?

Select Yes to Disable the AMT Automation Feature.


DESIGNATE AMT FUNCTIONALITY APPROACH (NOT RECOMMENDED)

Select Yes to allow the functionality to calculate the AMT using local currency amounts. This functionality requires that all units have the same local currency.


Flow Through

The Flow Through tab, allows you to activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will appear at the bottom of the page.


The following parameters and descriptions include:

IS FLOW-THROUGH ACTIVATED? (CANNOT BE CHANGED HERE) SEE MANAGE LICENSES

480


To activate Flow-Through, you must enter the license information:

  1. For the Feature Code, type Flow Through.

  2. Type the license number for the Feature Key.


AUTOMATICALLY CALCULATE FLOW-THROUGH FACTORS

  1. Select Yes to Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors and the data is transferred from one unit to another based on the Flow-Through profile that is set up.

  2. Select No and the data will not automatically transfer to another unit.


DISPLAY THE CALCULATE FLOW-THROUGH FACTOR RESULTS MENU ITEM

  1. Select Yes to calculate the Flow-Through Factor results menu item.

  2. Select No and the Flow-Through Factor results menu item is not calculated.


DISPLAYS FX FIELDS

  1. Select Yes to Display FX Fields.

  2. Select No and the FX Fields will not be displayed.


ALLOW AUDIT TRAIL FOR FLOW-THROUGH

  1. Select Yes to allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through.

  2. Select No and information for the Flow-Through will not appear on the Audit Trail.


    Journal Entries

    In Journal Entries, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.

    The following parameters and descriptions include:

    ENABLE CONFIGURABLE JOURNAL ENTRY


Alternative Provision Calculations

In the Alternative Provision Calculations, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.


The following parameters and descriptions include:

ALTERNATIVE PROVISION CALCULATION

Select Yes, to activate the Alternative Provision calculation which allows for scenario calculations to be layered onto the Tax Provision.


1ST SCENARIO CALCULATION POST

Select the Tax Adjustment code where the 1st scenario results should be posted.


2ND SCENARIO CALCULATION POST

Select the Tax Adjustment code where the 2nd scenario results should be posted.


BBC CALCULATION POST

Select the Tax Adjustment code where the BBC calculation results should be posted.


Bridge

In the Bridge, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.


The following parameters and descriptions include:

TAG LETTER USED FOR BRIDGE

Enter the Tax Adjustment code where the BBC calculation results should be posted.


BRIDGE INTO SINGLE UNIT LEVEL

Select Yes, to allow the bridge to run for a single unit.


BRIDGE INTO SUB-CONSOLIDATION LEVEL

Select Yes, to allow the bridge to run for a Sub-Consolidation of Units.


BRIDGE INTO CONSOLIDATION LEVEL

Select Yes, to allow the bridge to run for all active Units.


ACTIVATE UNIT MAPPING SCREEN

Select Yes, to display the Unit Mapping screen and activates unit mapping during Bridge Imports.


Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA)

In the Currency Translation, you can activate the system parameter. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.


The following parameter and description include:

ADDITIONAL CTA AMOUNT

Select Yes, to enable the ability to enter a reporting currency only adjustment on the Unit Details Miscellaneous tab.


RTP True-Up

In the RTP True-Up, you can activate system parameters. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom left of the screen.


The following parameters and descriptions include:

BALANCE SHEET ONLY RTP TRUE-UPS POSTS

Select Yes, to enable the amounts entered as Balance Sheet Only to be considered when the RTP posting functionality is launched.


DEFERRED ONLY RTP TRUE-UPS POSTING

Select Yes, to enable the amounts entered as Deferred Only to be considered when the RTP posting functionality is launched.


STATE RTP TRUE-UPS POSTING

Select Yes, to enable the amounts entered for the State to be considered when the RTP posting functionality is launched.


Integration

In Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration you can find the following topics.


516


General

In the General tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.

The following parameters and descriptions include:

ASSIGN DATASETS TO USERS

Adds the ability to assign datasets to a user.


ACTIVATE QUESTIONNAIRE

Activates the Global Access Questionnaire format.


DISPLAY USER STATUS REPORT

Displays the Global Access user status report.


ACTIVATE MANAGE ACTIVE DATASETS

Activates the Manage Active Datasets screen.


ADD REVIEW LEVELS

Add Review Levels 1-8. Makes Preparer, 1st Reviewer, and 2nd Reviewer viewable on the Manage Global Access Review administration page.


SET FORGOT PASSWORD EMAIL

The email address entered will populate in the To: field of an email when a user clicks the Forgot Password link.

Example: abc@yahoo.com


SET REQUEST NEW ACCESS EMAIL

The email address entered will populate in the To: field of an email when a user clicks the Request New Access link.

Example: abc@yahoo.com


ENABLE FILING GROUP REPORTS

Displays filing group reports in Global Access.


ASSIGN (NON-INTERIM) DATASETS TO USERS

Adds the ability to assign datasets to a user.


DISPLAY PRIOR YEAR INFORMATION

The Rollforward section of Temporary Difference pages shows data from the dataset that is determined (by the Datasets Relations section of the Datasets screen in Administration) to be the Prior Period.


HIDE RTP COLUMNS

Enables RTP adjustments to be entered directly into the Difference column on the Return to Provision page (Column type: retprov).


ADD COMMENTS TO RTPS

Enables comments to be added on the Return to Provision page (Column type: retprov).


SHOW UNIT DETAILS ON QUESTIONNAIRE REPORT

Activates the Foreign/Domestic classification, Country, and Currency for each unit on the Questionnaire Summary report (Global Access)/Questions report (Corporate Edition).


SHOW NEW QUESTIONNAIRE LAYOUT

Shows the new layout for the questionnaire.


SHOW POST RTP BUTTON

Automatic posting of return to provision adjustments can be triggered by selecting the Post RTP Button on the Return to Provision page.


POST GAAP TO STAT RTP

Enables the GAAP to STAT Return To Provision Posting.


SHOW LEGACY REPORTS FOR GLOBAL ACCESS

Select Yes to show the legacy reports in Global Access.


Activate Datasets for Global Access

To activate the Manage Active Datasets parameter:

  1. In Administration > System >Manage Configurations.

  2. Select Global Access.

  3. In the General tab, click Yes for Activate Manage Active Datasets.



ADS Col Type

In the ADS Col Type tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.


The following parameters and descriptions include:


DISPLAY DATASET TYPES IN DROPDOWN #1-10

To display the dataset in the Dataset Type list in the Global Access navigation.


ADS Col Type

Switch

In the Switch tab, you can activate system parameters for Global Access features. To find additional information about a parameter, click on the parameter name and the description will display at the bottom of the screen.


The following parameters and descriptions include:


SWITCH

To add a switch to the application, select a Switch from the drop-down list. The following parameters apply to more than one page throughout the application. From the Switch drop-down list, select a dataset type and then click Add.



532


Reporting

Reference chart for the Reporting tab:

REPORTING

PARAMETERS


Tax Provision








Enhanced View

Hide Deductible State Tax Detail


Add GAAP-STAT Report

GAAP-STAT Tag


Additional GAAP -STAT Tag

GAAP-STAT Classes


Additional GAAP -STAT Classes

Enable GAAP-STAT scrunch


Add CSC Breakout View

Exclude State Non-Cash Tax Adj from Fed Prv Rpt



Effective Tax Rate


Enhanced View


Add CSC Breakout Report

Add Consolidated PTBI Reconciliation


Effect of Rates Diff than Stat Perm Netting


Regulated

Expanded (FERC) View



REPORTING

PARAMETERS

TD for 411. x Column

TD for 410. x Column


TD for Debits/Credits Column


Export to CCH

Export to Returns


Export to ONESOURCE Income Tax

Export to CorpTax


Export to Vertex


Enhanced View

Deferred Balances


Subtotal Column Name

Subtotal Column Placement


Add CSC Breakout View

Ending Def Balance Post Tag and Event Type


Add Deferred Workpaper Report


Add Expected Deferred Report

State Level Enhanced View


Limit States on State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout

Add State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout Report


Hide state report menu when no states?

Limit Units on State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout


Hide state report details when no states?



REPORTING

PARAMETERS

Add Report Header

Formatting


Set Print Pages Wide

Add Report Footer


Reporting Currency Name in Report Headers

Client Name in Reports


Extension of Client Name in Reports

Treat Codes as Text in Excel


Number of Decimal Places for FX Rates

Number of Decimal Places for Rates


Use Parenthesis for Negative Numbers


APIC Pool Data Entry + Report

APIC Pool



Other

Allow Multiple Local Currencies on Reports

Remove Sequential RDS Constraints


Add Year to Date (YTD) Reports

Add + Define BS Offset Summary Report


UK Proof and P+L Reports

Enable Advanced Plug-In Reports


Show Legacy Reports Tab

Enable VA Contra Accounts for the Net Deferred Report


Advanced Functionality

ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY

PARAMETERS

Reference chart for Advanced Functionality tab:

Payable Functionality (Recommended)

Payable


Limit Payable Date Range

Simple Liability Functionality (Not Recommended)


Payable Reclass Functionality

Designate Calendar/Fiscal Year for Posting


Enable Payable Summary

Enable Tax Adjustments Payable Mapping Functionality

Custom Tab 1

Number of Custom Tabs to display


Enable Reclass Tab

Custom Tab 2


Transfer Payable Transaction Type


Disable the AMT Automation Feature

Alternative Minimum Tax


Designate AMT Functionality Approach


Is Flow-Through Activated? (cannot be changed here)

Flow Through


Display the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item

Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors


Allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through

Displays FX Fields





ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY

PARAMETERS

Journal Entries

Enhanced View

Enable Configurable Journal Entry Report


Display Zero Tax Calcs on JE Output Reports

Display Zero Book Calcs on JE Output Reports


Rounding of Journal Entry Values

Journal Entry Supplemental Field Name #1-9


Lock JE Type field on J.E. Screen

Show Delete All button on Journal Entry Screen


Journal Entry Tag Group #1-9

Journal Entry Tag Group #1-9 Name


Journal Entry State Group Name #1-9

Journal Entry Rollup Set


Alternative Provision Calculations

Journal Entry State Group 1-9 State(s)


1st Scenario Calculation Posts

Alternative Provision Calculations


BBC Calculation Posts

2nd Scenario Calculation Posts



Bridge

Bridge into into Single Unit Level

Tag Letter Used for Bridge


Bridge into Consolidation Level

Bridge into Sub-Consolidation Level




ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY

PARAMETERS

Activate Unit Mapping Screen



Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA)



RTP True-Up



Additional Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) Amount


Balance Sheet Only RTP True -Ups Posts


Deferred Only RTP True_Ups Posting

State RTP True-Ups Posting


Integration

Reference chart for the Reporting tab:

INTEGRATION

PARAMETERS


Return






Transfer data to ONESOURCE Income Tax

Select Dataset to Transfer data to ONESOURCE Income Tax

Reverse Liability and Equity Sign?

Transfer Reporting Currency?


Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax -UK

Select Dataset to Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax - UK

Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax - AU

Select Dataset to Transfer data to ONESOURCE Corporate Tax - AU


Estimated Payments


Transfer Amounts in Reporting Currency



INTEGRATION

PARAMETERS

1-4 Quarter Actual Months

1-4 Quarter Actual Data


1-4 Extension Actual Data

1-4 Quarter Forecast Data


1-4 Extension Forecast Data

1-4 Extension Actual Months


Federal (Q1-4) Payable Txn Type

Transfer Data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments


Display Consolidated Members Code

State (Q1-4) Payable Txn Type



Clear All Previously Imported Categories and Numbers in Data Query

Data Query Tool


State Apportionment

Choose Data Source for Data Query Tool


Transfer data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment


General Ledger Manager Enable Data Transfer from General Ledger Manager


Data Entry

DATA ENTRY

PARAMETERS

Reference chart for the Data Entry tab:

Display the 'Next Value' option when choosing a Subclass

Classes/Subclasses


Exclude Sub-Classes during Copy



DATA ENTRY

PARAMETERS



Temporary Difference






Enable Default Data Types

Use default types in Bridge Import


Allow Read/Write users to modify TD types?

Allow Read/Write users to modify NOL types?


Allow Read/Write users to modify ATTD types?

Allow Read/Write users to modify SAATD types?


Allow Read/Write users to modify SATTD types?

Lock beginning balances for Read/Write users?


Global Access

Reference chart for the Global Access tab:

GLOBAL ACCESS

PARAMETERS


General








Assign Datasets to Users

Activate Questionnaire


Display User Status Report

Activate Manage Active Datasets


Add Review Levels

Set Forgot Password Email


Set Request New Access Email

Enable Filing Group Reports


Assign (non-interim) Datasets to Users

Display Prior Year Information


Hide RTP Columns

Add Comments to RTPs


Show Unit Details on Questionnaire Report

Show Post RTP Button

Show New Questionnaire Layout


Show Legacy Reports for Global Access

Post GAAP to STAT RTP



ADS COL Type

Display Dataset Types in Drop-down #1-20


Switch

SKINS PARAMETERS


Q1 Forecast

Q1 Actual


Q2 Forecast

Q2 Actual


Q3 Forecast

Q3 Actual


retprov

reporting


yeprov

retprovgs


yeprovgs


PTBI

PARAMETERS



Add Tag to PTBI Menu


Q1 Actual

D-Default Tag

E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import

M-Manual

P-POSTEND R-RTP


Q2 Actual

Q1 Forecast


Q3 Actual

Q2 Forecast


reporting

Q3 Forecast


retprovgs

retprov


yeprovgs

yeprov




Perms

PARAMETERS

Add Tag to Perm Drop-down Menu


Q1 Actual

D-Default Tag

E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import

M-Manual

P-POSTEND R-RTP

Q2 Actual

Q1 Forecast


Q3 Actual

Q2 Forecast


reporting

Q3 Forecast


retprovgs

retprov


yeprovgs

yeprov



Temps PARAMETERS


Add Tag to Temp Drop-down Menu


Q1 Forecast

Q1 Actual

D-Default Tag

E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import

M-Manual

P-POSTEND R-RTP


Q2 Forecast

Q2 Actual


Q3 Forecast

Q3 Actual


retprov

reporting


retprovgs


yeprov

yeprovgs(gaap)

yeprovgs


yeprovgs(stat)




Payable

PARAMETERS

Add Tag to Payable Drop-down Menu


Q1 Actual

D-Default Tag

E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import

M-Manual

P-POSTEND R-RTP


Q2 Actual

Q1 Forecast


Q3 Actual

Q2 Forecast


reporting

Q3 Forecast


retprovgs

retprov


yeprovgs

yeprov



Tax Adj

PARAMETERS

Add Tag to Tax Adjs Drop-down Menu D-Default Tag E-Offset Equity

G-Offset Goodwill

I-Import M-Manual

Q1 Actual

P-POSTEND R-RTP

Q2 Actual

Q1 Forecast


Q3 Actual

Q2 Forecast


reporting

Q3 Forecast


retprovgs

retprov


yeprovgs




TBS

PARAMETERS

Add Tag to TAx Adjs Drop-down Menu


Q1 Actual

D-Default Tag

E-Offset Equity G-Offset Goodwill I-Import

M-Manual

P-POSTEND R-RTP


Q2 Actual

Q1 Forecast


Q3 Actual

Q2 Forecast


Q3 Forecast


reporting

retprovgs

retprov


yeprovgs

yeprov



Admin

Reference Chart for the Admin tab:

ADMIN

PARAMETERS

User Options


Administer User Section Information

Set User Restrictions



Password Options






Other



Password Expiration Time

Minimum Digits in Password


Minimum Length of Password

Lockout Period after Failed Login


Maximum Failed Login Attempts Before Lockout

Passwords Kept in History


Make User Logins Not Case-Sensitive


Deferred Provision Only Data Entry


Track Log Messages

Allow Global Attachments



ADMIN

PARAMETERS


Browse and Update Attachment Button

Attachment Save As Button


Enable Database Analyzer

Enable Audit Trail when Running Reports


Hide Data Source for non-admin users

Disable Audit Trail for Numbers Import and Bridging


Show Unit Name Before Code

Modify Unit Codes


Hide Case Numbers in Manage Datasets


Manage Restricted Features

In Administration > System > Manage Restricted Features a parameter list is available that requires a password to access it. The password is typically not released to clients because it opens a page that lets you delete and modify system items that can corrupt the system.


Manage Restricted Features includes:


EXPORT SYSTEM PARAMETERS

To export parameters for Restricted Features:

  1. Select Administration, and then click Export Categories.

  2. Type the File Name, to specify the export file.

  3. Click Save.

  4. Click Yes for Do you want to export Unit Components?

  5. Click Yes for Do you want to export User Component information?

  6. Click OK, when the export is complete.

  7. Open the file and type the parameter in the tab #PD#.


IMPORT SYSTEM PARAMETERS

To import a parameter in Managed Restricted Features:

  1. Select Administration, and then click Import Categories.

  2. To specify the import file, type the File Name.

  3. Choose the file name and then Open.

  4. For Categories Imported Successfully, click OK.

  5. The Import Log will appear for review.

  6. If Errors exist, correct the #CP# Parameters sheet and re-import the file.


Warning: Some parameters ensure the proper functionality of the system. Do not manipulate a pre-loaded crucial parameter without understanding its purpose. If a crucial parameter is edited or deleted, it may


corrupt the software and the system may not run properly or at all. Parameters can only be deleted in

Manage Restricted Features


PARAMETER NAME

534 .

The parameter name is case-specific and must be entered exactly as it is given. Some of the available

system parameters 758 are contained in the reference section. For more information regarding parameters

and their functionality, contact your Client Manager or Support


PARAMETER VALUE

15.

The parameter value is the associated value for the specific Paramkey. There can be more than one Paramvalue and each may have a different purpose.


Manage Rollups

In Administration > System > Manage Rollups you can create multiple rollup sets of data. There are three types of rollup sets:


Manage User Questions

To Manage User Questions, you can type questions in the data entry field and then click Update. You must activate the following system parameters in Manage Restricted Features to use this feature.

  1. SHOW_ADVANCEDQUESTIONNAIRE

  2. SHOW_WIZARD

  3. SHOW_NEWWIZARDSTATUS




Plugin Reports

In Administration > System > Plugin Reports you can create and manage plug-in reports. You must activate the SHOW_PLUGINDEV parameter to use the Plugin Reports. The parameter is activated by importing the Parameter, SHOW_PLUGINDEV with a paramvalue of 1 nto the system.


You can see all selected prompt options when a custom report is selected. You will see a default dataset 1 based on the selection in the Review & Edit.


The functionality expands the types of data that can be brought into a plug-in report. XSL style sheets can be applied to format the queried data and the results can be published in the Reports menu. Using SQL statements, Plugin Reports can query data stored in the application.


  1. Select Make available as a custom report and the report will appear in Reporting. If this option is not marked, you can execute the query within the Plugin Reports page.

  2. Select the report and then click Run Query.


QUERY DETAILS

Select Queries to view saved reports. Upon selection of a report, the other fields are automatically populated with the corresponding information for the saved report. You can create New, Import and Export queries.

  1. For Queries, click New, Save, Cancel, Import or Export.

  2. Type the Name.

  3. Select the Style sheet file.

  4. Type the Description. This field is not required. It is to enter supplemental information about the report you are creating.

  5. Select the Source.

    1. Query

    2. Stored Procedure


  6. Select Options.

  7. Select the Report Location.

    1. Standard

    2. Legacy

  8. Select the Module.

    1. Provision

    2. Estimated Payments

    3. Interim

  9. Select the Menu Location (Report Type). You can select where in the reporting hierarchy the report will appear.

    1. Unit

    2. Filing Unit

    3. Consolidated

    4. Sub-consolidated

  10. Select Sub Menu Location. You can select where in the reporting hierarchy the report will appear.

    1. Federal

    2. State

    3. State Summary

  11. Select Misc.

    1. Make available as custom report.

    2. Compare Datasets

    3. Compare Report Level

    4. Prompt for Rollup

      • Deferred

      • ETR

      • Trial Balance

    5. Prompt for Class

    6. Format results to standard XML.

  12. Select SQL.

  13. Click Run Query to run the query.

  14. Select Result to review the data returned upon running the query.

  15. Select Legend.



    Notes:


To View Data Source History Numbers:

  1. Select All or a specific Dataset.

  2. Select All or a specific Component Type.

  3. Select All or a specific Unit.

  4. Select All or a specific User.

  5. Select All or a specific State.

  6. Select All or a specific To.

  7. Select All or a specific From.

  8. Click Go. All of the data saved for the Audit Trail appears in the page. The list appears in sections by Component Type.

    View Numbers Data Source History


    Notes:




ADMINISTRATION - EXPORT TO EXCEL

You can select the Data Source for data entry such as a Permanent Difference, Temporary Difference, Active Workpapers and Data Source Bridge Import.

  1. Click the plus sign to expand the list for review.

  2. Right mouse click and select Export to Excel.

  3. Select the File name and then Save.


DATA ENTRY - EXPORT TO EXCEL

You can select the Data Source for data entry such as a Permanent Difference, Temporary Difference, Active Workpapers and Data Source Bridge Import.

  1. Double-click Data Source for a Component Code.

  2. Right mouse click and select Export to Excel.

  3. Select the File name and then Save.


    Note: The data is saved in the same format as the filtered information. Upon opening the Excel file, you will see the data in a grid format that mirrors the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. If you choose not to filter, you may end up with a long list of items to sort through.



    View Categories Data Source History

    In Administration > Audit Trail > View Categories Data Source History lets you to review the Audit Trail for balances imported into the Tax Provision application. In View Categories Data Source History you will find rows of information that you can filter, sort, and export to Excel.



Adding Documents to ONESOURCE FileRoom

You can add documents to ONESOURCE FileRoom at three levels:

  1. Dataset Level

  2. Unit Level

  3. Component Level


    In the Tax Provision navigation bar, click Documents to open the ONESOURCE FileRoom application. When the Documents dialog box opens, you can select the required Document Criteria.


    The system requires the following information:


Note: The system pre-populates the Description, and File Name when documents are added at the component level.



ONESOURCE FileRoom Setup Section


DRAWER

When you license the ONESOURCE FileRoom, all drawers are available in the Drawer drop-down list. Without a license, one free drawer is available.

To add a document:

  1. Click Actions to open the Attachments dialog box.

  2. Click Add Document. You can view all documents associated with the item.

Attachments Dialog Box


Note: If you continue to add documents at the lowest level (component level), then your Index Values will be pre-populated. The index values will be completed based on the level you are attaching a document.



Example: The index values below are automatically completed for the Dataset, Unit Code, Unit Name because the document is attached at the component level.


Add Document Dialog Box


Jobs

You can find the status for all of your import and export files in Jobs within the Tax Provision Navigation Bar. The Jobs page lets you review the import/export log information and the status of your import/export request. The system notifies you when the process is complete.


Because the execution proceeds independently in the background, other processes may be started before other processes have finished. You can continue to work on tasks while the Dataset, Data Entry, and Category imports and exports continue to process.


Use Jobs to review the progress of your import and export actions. You can see all import and export requests and log files in this page. Sort and Filter the information in this page to find the jobs, easier. You can also drag columns to group the information in this page.


Jobs


Jobs Interface - Part 1

You will see the following information for each job request.

Jobs Part 1



1


Request ID - System Generated ID


2


Transfer - display nature of the request: import or export.


3


Transfer Type - display the transfer source type:

  • Spreadsheet Import Import Mappings (Bridge)

  • Bridge Import from file Export Mappings (Bridge)

  • Bridge Import from General Ledger Import Master Chart Of Accounts Manager

  • ONESOURCE Income Tax Import Mappings (Tax Return)

  • ONESOURCE Estimated Payments Export Mappings (Tax Return)

  • ONESOURCE State Apportionment Export Payable Categories

  • Export Dataset Import Reporting Datasets

  • Import Categories Excel Add-In

  • Export Categories


4


Dataset Name - display dataset name to be user for target (import) or source (export).


5


Report Level - display one of the following levels: Unit, Subconsolidation, Consolidated if applicable.


6


Report Level Value - display value for the selected report level.


Jobs Interface - Part 2

You will see the following information for each job request.

Jobs Part 2



1


Status - display one of the following options:

  • Pending – request has been sent to queue, but have not start processing.

  • Processing – request in progress.

  • Completed – request completed without user’s errors.

  • Completed with errors – request has been partially completed with some user’s errors.

  • Failed – system failed to process request.


2


Submitted - display date stamp when request has been submitted. All data is sorted by submitted date (the newest at the top) by default.


3


Completed - display date stamp when request has been completed.


4


Download - display icon for user to download or preview file (export, bridge preview) where applicable.


5


Log - display icon for user to download details for last import log.


6


Submitted By -display user id used for login to ONESOURCE platform.


7


Components - display components data entry page.


Log Files

VIEW LAST IMPORT LOG (MY DATASETS)

The stored logs located in Jobs are the results from the last Spreadsheet Last Import (Dataset)


554 into the

dataset. The log provides the Target dataset name and the path of the Source filename that imported. The log provides each worksheet and the imported data status.


VIEW LAST IMPORT LOG (BRIDGE)

The stored logs located in Jobs for the Provision and Estimated Payment datasets are from the last time the

Bridge Import 554 was imported to bridge the General Ledger data into the dataset. The log file has the start

time, the areas of data, and the finish time. To understand the amounts imported using the bridge mapping, review the Bridge Archives.


ONESOURCE STATE APPORTIONMENT LOGS

The stored logs located in Jobs are the results from the last transfer of the State Apportionment transfer into the dataset. The log provides the following information: Code, Description, File Name, Attached, and By.


ONESOURCE ESTIMATED PAYMENTS LOGS

The stored logs located in Jobs are the results from the last transfer of the Estimated Payments transfer into the dataset. The log provides the following information: Code, Description, File Name, Attached, and By.


VIEW REPORTING DATASET LOG

For Sequential datasets, the ending balances and rates in the first chronological dataset must agree with the opening balance and rates in the next chronological dataset. If there are differences in the test of information in the two datasets, they are listed in this log. The sequential dataset test can be overridden with a system

parameter

554. Contact your client manager or support

554

for more information.


VIEW LAST IMPORT LOG (CATEGORIES)

The stored logs located in Jobs reflects the last time categories were imported into the application. To permanently store the information to a file, right-click the log and select Export to Microsoft Excel. Then, you can save and print the log file for reference.


Importing

Topics discussed in this section include importing categories, importing data using templates, bridging data from a trial balance extract, and transferring data using integration.


In My Datasets, you can import data using one or multiple worksheets for the following import options:


To Spreadsheet import data into a dataset:

  1. Click for a selected dataset to see the Import options.

  2. Select Spreadsheet Import (Dataset). The Run Spreadsheet Import dialog box opens.


CHOOSE FORMAT(S) AND FILE(S) TO POPULATE THE DATASET:

  1. Select OTP Format, or import_rolling_pin.

  2. Click Browse, to choose the file to open.

  3. Select the import file.

  4. Click Open and then Add.

  5. Click Next.

  6. Click IMPORT.

  7. Click Refresh rpt data (optional).

  8. To review the progress or log files for the import, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.


    Spreadsheet Import


    ONESOURCE Tax Provision Format

    You can create a blank Import_Numbers spreadsheet (template), by selecting Export in My Datasets


    594, or

    Export the Data Entry 598 pages.




To Bridge Import data into a dataset:

  1. Click for a dataset to see the Import options.

  2. Select Bridge Import.


SET UP CONFIGURATIONS FOR DATASET

  1. Select the Target Components to be updated.

  2. Click All Component Types or specific components to update component data.


    Bridge Import


  3. Select Class and Subclass or Tag (depending on the Target Dataset type), Report Level and Unit Type Value (for Unit or Subconsolidation Report Levels only).


FOR CLASS/SUBCLASS DATASETS

  1. Select Class. You can change default class value Bridge – GL Automation.

  2. Select Subclass. You can change the Default - Default to a user defined subclass.


    FOR TAG DATASETS



To activate the system parameters for Bridge select Administration > System > Manage Configurations


SELECT BROWSE FILE OR UPLOAD FROM GENERAL LEDGER MANAGER.

To browse for the import file:

  1. Choose the format(s) and file(s) of legacy data.

  2. To open the file directory, click Browse.

  3. Select the file(s) with General ledger extract file.

  4. Click Open and then Add.

  5. To import additional files click Browse, choose a file and then Add.

  6. Click Preview Bridge Import to view the bridge mapping.

  7. Click Submit to update Tax Provision data entry pages.

  8. Click Start Over to cancel the bridge import.


To Upload Data from General Ledger Manager:

  1. Choose the Master Trial Balance Year and Master Trial Balance.

  2. Select Preview Bridge Import to view the bridge mapping.

  3. Select Submit to update Tax Provision.

  4. Click Start Over to cancel the bridge import.


    To activate the system parameters for General Ledger Manager as a data source select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > General Ledger Manager > Enable Data Transfer from General Ledger Manager.


A message appears All report data will be refreshed automatically. Are you sure you want to update Tax Provision?

  1. Click Cancel to cancel the update.

  2. Click OK to update the Tax Provision.

  3. To review the progress of the import, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.


    PREVIEW BRIDGE IMPORT AND ONESOURCE BRIDGE LOGS

    You can choose Preview Bridge Import to view Bridge Mapping, Missing Sublines, Missing Bridge Assignment, and Missing Units. Component types include PTBI (Local), PTBI (Reporting), Tax Accounts (Activity), Book Trial Balances (Activity), Perm Diffs – Tax Basis (Activity), Perm Diffs – Book/Tax Basis (Activity), Temp Diffs – Tax Basis (Activity), Temp Diffs – Book/Tax Basis (Activity) and Temp Diffs – Tax Basis (Bal Sheet Only).


    The Bridge Import data can be reviewed in Jobs 551 . Jobs also provides the bridge import log status.


    When the data source is General Ledger Manager, the beginning and ending balances are hyperlinked to General Ledger Manager. When a hyperlink is selected, General Ledger Manager opens and you can access the supporting details for the selected amount.


    Bridge Process


If an application is not available in My Datasets, you must activate the parameter.


Note: To import data from ONESOURCE Income Tax, ONESOURCE Estimated Payments and

ONESOURCE State Apportionment, an administrator must activate the system parameters 758 . To activate

the parameters select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Return.


  1. In the Return tab, click Yes to activate the data transfer link for Tax.

  2. In the Estimated Payments tab, click Yes to activate the data transfer link for Estimated Payments.

  3. In the State Apportionment tab, click Yes to activate the data transfer link for State Apportionment.

  4. Click Reload System Configurations.


Only users with assigned permissions can access the ONESOURCE applications in the data transfer list.



Return Worksheet

The worksheet has a common list of action items shared by the applications. Select the ONESOURCE application from My Datasets, Import, and the worksheet appears.

Integration - Return Worksheet


RETRIEVE DATA

  1. To retrieve data from the application select items from the drop-down lists. For example, the Target Dataset and Year.

  2. Click Retrieve Data.

  3. Then, select the type of data to retrieve; the worksheet is populated with data from the application.

  4. The types of data to retrieve differ from one application to another. Additional tabs may be created within the worksheet depending on the data transferred.


    Types of Data to Retrieve

    Return Worksheet


POPULATE DATA

  1. Review the data on the worksheet that transferred from the application for accuracy.

  2. Update the data on the worksheet, if needed.

  3. Click Populate Data to Provision to transfer the data on the worksheet to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision Data entry pages.


See Jobs 551 to see the staus of the transfer.


NEW


RETURN TO TAX PROVISION OVERVIEW

To complete the Return to Provision transfer process from the ONESOURCE Income Tax application, you can create an empty dataset or use an existing dataset for each year. This dataset holds the data that is transferred from the Income Tax application to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. Previously, you had to adjust the provision data for Return to Provision (RTP) true-ups manually. The enhanced integration between the two applications allows you to update the provision data by transferring the income tax data from the return and posting the RTP true-ups. To post the RTP adjustments, you must relate the Tax Return Dataset created to the same or previous period RTP Provision Dataset, as well as, the same or future period RTP Target Dataset in the ONESOURCE Tax Provision system’s Dataset area.

Task / Steps:

  1. Create a Return Dataset (for a Return to Provision Transfer) /Creating a Dataset.

  2. Relate the Return Dataset (to the Final Provision and Current Provision) /Setting Up Data Relations.

  3. Create a State Tax Rate Dataset (New Year Provision, Transfer State Rates) / Populate State Rates Option.

  4. Return Worksheet /Return Worksheet.

  5. Post Return To Provision /Posting the Return to Provision (RTP). You will find this option in Return Datasets only.


Tax Return Worksheet

ACCESSING THE RETURN WORKSHEET

  1. Select My Datasets and then Import.

  2. Select ONESOURCE Income Tax. The Return Worksheet opens.

  3. Verify that the Return Dataset is correct.

  4. Review the Year.

  5. Choose a Source Dataset from the list.

  6. Select the Mapset.

  7. Review the Related Provision Dataset and verify that it’s the dataset you want to compare to the return data.


Check that the following fields are correct:


Note: State Modifications are not available to transfer.



Transfer Data to ONESOURCE Income Tax

TRANSFERRING PROVISION DATA TO THE RETURN

  1. In the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application, assign the parameter with the correct Provision Dataset.

  2. In the ONESOURCE Income Tax software, go to Tools > Binder Identification.

  3. Select the Year and Binders.


TRANSFERRING THE RTP

  1. In the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application, create a new, Return, Dataset.

  2. Relate it to the Provision RTP and Provision Target.

  3. In ONESOURCE Income Tax, click Tools > Binder Identification.

  4. Select the Year and Binders.

  5. Click Tools > Options > Enterprise Options.

  6. Select the Year from the drop-down list.

  7. Select Federal and State as Final.


    Populate State Rates Option

    The State Rates option allows the data transfer of both the State Apportionment Rates and the State Tax Rates.


State Apportionment Worksheet

The State Apportionment Worksheet is a staging area for the ONESOURCE State Apportionment data. Once you define the State Apportionment Worksheet and transfer the data, the State Apportionment Worksheet acquires several tabs, each which reflects the data that transferred.


ACCESSING THE STATE APPORTIONMENT WORKSHEET

  1. Select My Datasets and then Import.

  2. Click ONESOURCE State Apportionment. The State Apportionment Worksheet opens.

  3. Verify that the Target Dataset is correct.

  4. Review the Year.

  5. Select a Scenario from the list.

  6. Select the Apportionment Type from the available options. Select Separate, Group, or Separate/ Group.

  7. Click Use Entity Map and then select the map.

  8. Click Retrieve State Apportionment.


Note: All available scenarios from ONESOURCE State Apportionment appear in the list.



What Transfers to the State Apportionment Worksheet

TRANSFERRED ITEMS

The State Apportionment data received includes:


CHECKBOX

The selected rows populate ONESOURCE Tax Provision from the worksheet. To select all rows, select the box in the header row.


UNIT CODE

The unit code in Tax Provision will equal the Entity number in State Apportionment. If you do not use an "Entity Map", the unit code defaults to the entity code in ONESOURCE State Apportionment.


STATE CODE


APPORTIONMENT TYPE

The apportionment types include Separate, Group, Separate & Group.


ENTITY MAP

You can select a unit map that is set up in the ONESOURCE platform.


Transferring Data from ONESOURCE State Apportionment

  1. Select My Datasets and then Import.

  2. Select ONESOURCE State Apportionment. The State Apportionment Worksheet opens.

  3. Review the following information for accuracy:

  4. Click Retrieve State Apportionment.

  5. Select Populate Data to Provision to transfer the data from the worksheet to the dataset.

  6. Open the State Apportionment Dataset, select the States, and review the transferred data.


You can review the results of the transfer in Jobs

551 .


ONESOURCE Estimated Payments

TRANSFERRING DATA FROM ONESOURCE ESTIMATED PAYMENTS

Enhanced Integration enables you to send and receive data between the ONESOURCE Tax Provision and ONESOURCE Estimated Payments applications at the appropriate times of the year. This section describes the transfer process when sending data from the Estimated Payments application to the Tax Provision application.


To receive data from the Estimated Payments application, you will need to activate the parameters.


To activate the parameters to transfer data from Estimated Payments select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Estimated Payments > Transfer data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments > Yes.

  1. Select Federal and/or State, Quarter and/or EXT to define the Payable Txn Type that appears in Payables within Data entry after the transfer.

  2. Click Yes for Transfer Amounts in Reporting Currency.

  3. Select the Actual and/or Forecast Datasets.

  4. Select the Actual Months.


ESTIMATED PAYMENTS OVERVIEW

To complete the Estimated Payments transfer process from the ONESOURCE Income Tax application, you can create an empty dataset each year or utilize an existing one. A dataset holds the data that is transferred from the Income Tax application to the ONESOURCE Tax Provision application. The integration between the two applications enables you to update the Tax Provision data by transferring the income tax data from the return and to Estimated Payments.

Task / Steps:

  1. Create a new dataset for Estimated Payments or utilize an existing dataset.

  2. Relate the Estimated Payments.

    Estimated Payments Worksheet

    The Estimated Payments Worksheet is a staging area for the ONESOURCE Estimated Payments data. Once you define the Estimated Payments Worksheet and transfer the data, the Estimated Payments Worksheet acquires several tabs, each tab reflects the data that transferred.



Note that to make the members codes for the consolidated group appear in column B in the ONESOURCE Estimated Payments Worksheet, you must activate the parameter called Display Consolidated Members Codes. The Display Consolidated Members Codes parameter appears in the Integration tab of Administration- Manage Configurations, in the Estimated Payments secondary tab.


The Estimated Payment Worksheet allows you to transfer the estimated payment balances for selected Quarters by Jurisdiction and to update the taxes payable.


ACCESSING THE ESTIMATED PAYMENTS WORKSHEET

  1. Select My Datasets and then Import.

  2. Click ONESOURCE Estimated Payments. The Estimated Payments Worksheet opens.

  3. Verify that the Target Dataset is correct.

  4. Review the Year.

  5. Click Quarter or Extension.

  6. Select the Filing Type.

  7. For Separate filing type, click Use Entity Map and then choose a map.

  8. If the Target Dataset is a tag dataset, choose a Tag.

  9. For Consolidated or Both filing types, choose a Target Unit.

  10. Click Retrieve Data and select one of the options:


ONESOURCE Estimated Payments Worksheet - Filing Type, Tag and Target Unit


What Transfers to the Estimated Payments Worksheet

TRANSFERRED ITEMS

The Estimated Payment data received includes:


COMPANY

The company name transfers.


MEMBERS

The members of the consolidated group transfer as a Code or Name depending on the parameter selected in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Estimated Payments > Display Consolidated Members Code.


UNIT CODE

The unit code in Tax Provision will equal the Entity number in Estimated Payments.


FISCAL TYPE

The filing type transfers.


FISCAL YEAR

The Tax Year transfers.


JURISDICTION

You can review the results of the transfer in Jobs

551 .


Within the Estimated Payments Worksheet, the data in the range of cells highlighted in green can be updated. However, the data in the range of cells highlighted in yellow is Read Only. After you transfer the data from the worksheet to ONESOURCE Tax Provision, review the cells highlighted in red and make the necessary corrections, then transfer the data to update the worksheet.


Note: The data transferred writes over the data previously transferred data.




Transferring Data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments

  1. Select My Datasets and then Import.

  2. Select ONESOURCE Estimated Payments. The Estimated Payments Worksheet opens.

  3. Check that the following fields are correct:

  4. Click the Retrieve Data icon.

  5. Select Populate Data to Provision.


    The status bar shows the transfer is in progress.

  6. Review the Estimated Payments Dataset.

  1. The Estimated Worksheet is saved in Global Attachments, within the System folder in Administration.

  2. To review the Estimated Payment log file, select Jobs

    551.

  3. To verify the transferred data, select Data Entry and verify the Target Dataset data.

  4. Select Federal or State Payable and review the transferred data.

  5. A unique Data Source icon appears for the Unit Payable Data Review and Audit Trail data that populated from Estimated Payments.



Notes:



Transfer Data to ONESOURCE Estimated Payments

To transfer data to the Estimated Payments for the tax liability calculations, you will need to set up the several parameters.


To activate the parameters to transfer data from Estimated Payments select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Integration > Estimated Payments > Transfer data from ONESOURCE Estimated Payments > Yes.

  1. Select Yes, for Transfer Amounts in Reporting Currency.

  2. Select the Datasets that represent actual or forecast data in ONESOURCE Estimated Payments.

5. Select the Actual Months.


Notes:



Data Entry Import

In Review & Edit, you can use a single template to import data into a specified component's Data Entry page. When you use the import option in an Data Entry page, the system can import data for just that page. This lets you import a specific template into a component's page. For example, you select the Temp Diff Tax

_Basis component and use the #UTD# Unit Temp Diffs-Tax Basis 187 worksheet to import data to that page.


Note: To activate the units, you can Import the #U# Unit worksheet template with a components template.


  1. Click in a Data Entry page and the Import dialog opens. By default, the Base Dataset is selected from My Datasets.



  2. Click the folder and specify the file in which to import.

  3. Click to submit the import request.

    Data Entry Import


  4. Select Jobs in the navigation bar to review the import log information and the status of your import request.


Note: An administrator must assign permissions for users in order to import data into Data Entry pages.



Category Import

In Administration > Import Categories you can import category items using the Import Categories

template 591. The template is an Excel workbook containing multiple worksheets. Each sheet corresponds to

a page found in Administration. Only Administrators can import the Import Categories template. After the

template is imported, review Jobs

551 for any errors

775 that occurred during import.



Category items can be imported when data is populated in the Import Categories template 589. The template

is an Excel workbook containing multiple sheets. Each sheet corresponds to a page found in the Administration area. Only Administrators can import the Import Categories template. After the template is

imported, you can review the status in Jobs for any errors 589 that occurred during import.


You can import Dataset Categories using the category spreadsheet.


To import categories:

  1. Select Administration and then Import Categories. Import Categories


  2. Specify the Categories Import File and then click Open.

  3. For Categories Imported Successfully, click OK.

  4. To review the progress of the import, select Jobs 551 in the navigation bar.


Import Categories Template

To create a template for entering data and importing into the system, you can export categories by selecting

Administration > Export Categories.


The Import Categories template contains the following sheets:

#ADS# Archive Datasets, #ARDS# Archive Reporting Datasets, #CATTD# AfterTax TempDiffs, #CD# Datasets, #CDRF# Def RollForwards, #CDSR# Dataset Relations, #CRD# Reporting Datasets, #COU# Countries, #CUR# Currencies, #CDRF# Def RollForwards, #CIFTD# Incl. for Temp Diffs, #CLRF# Liab RollForwards, #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs, #CNRF# NOL RollForwards, #CP# Parameters, #CPRU# ParamsReportsUser, #CPD# Permanent Differences,#CPTBI# PTBI Codes, #CPYBK# Payable Buckets, #CPYRL# Payable Rollups, #CPYTP# Payable Txn Types, #CRU# Component Rollup Sets, #CS# States, #CSAATD# St AfterApp TempDiff, #CSATTD# St AfterTax TempDiff, #CSC# SubConsolidations, #CSTA# St Tax Adjs, #CTA# Tax Adjustments, #CTBL# Trial Balance Lines, #CTBSL# Trial Balance SubLines, #CTD# Temporary Differences, #CTDP# Temp Diff Postings, #CU# Units, #CUC# User Components, #CUSR# Users, #CUSRGP# Group Permissions, Users#ICOTXNT# Inter Co Txn Types, #ICOTRTT# Inter Co Trtmnt Types, #CUNC# Unit Components, and #CUNCM# Unit Component Multiple,#JEN# Journal Entry Numbers.


Warning: Do not modify the portion of the sheet names between the # signs. If you do so, the sheet will be ignored upon import.



Import Reporting Datasets

Use Administration > Import Reporting Datasets to import reporting datasets. For Sequential


404

datasets, the periods must be sequential and the underlying data in the datasets must rollover. For Additive

405 datasets, the periods must be identical.


You will import reporting datasets by completing the appropriate fields in the #CDR# Reporting Dataset

worksheet in the Import Categories template 591 . Although the worksheet is in the Import Categories

template, the reporting datasets worksheet will not import when selecting the Import Categories 589 option.


When importing the mappings for the Import Reporting Dataset, the related datasets must be in the system. The system adds the mappings only if the dataset names match the names of the related datasets (exactly) in Manage Datasets > Datasets.


Only Administrators can import the Import Categories template. If there are errors during the import process,

review the log file Jobs

551 .


See Reporting Datasets 404 for more information about Sequential and Additive datasets.


Import Mappings

You can Import Bridge Mapping items using the Import Bridge Map template.


For hosted solutions, you can export the mappings to generate the template. The file can contain any of these sheets: #MPTBI# Pre-Tax Book Income, #MTA# Tax Accounts, #MPD# Perm Diffs, #MTD# Temp Diffs

- Tax Basis, #MTDBOS# Temp Diff BSO, #MAPD# Amortized Perm Diffs, #MATD# Temp Diffs - Bk Tx Basis, and #MTBBB# Trial Balance.


Warning: Importing bridge mappings clears all existing mappings. If you append to existing mappings, you should export them and add to that file, rather than using a new file.



Exporting

Topics discussed in this section include exporting categories from Administration, as well as dataset data, and component data from the Data Entry pages. When exporting data, and the export is complete, you can save the file from the current browser page. A download message appears for saving the file. The message you see varies and depends on the browser and version of the browser in use.



EXPORT GROUP

  1. Select a box to specify the dataset(s) to export to an Excel file.

  2. Clicking the box in the top left side of the grid selects all datasets. A checkmark appears in that column for all datasets.


  3. Click to export a group of datasets.


    My Datasets - Export Group


    EXPORT DATASETS

    To export data from a dataset to create a dataset import template and backup file:

    1. Select a box to specify the dataset(s) to export to an Excel file.

    2. Click and the Export Dataset dialog box opens in which you can make selections to create the file.



Select Dataset(s), Subconsolidation or Unit to export the data for the specified datasets.


Export Dataset


  1. Type the Export File Name and click Export.

  2. To review the progress of the export, select Jobs


551 in the navigation bar.


See Exporting 593 for more information about exporting dataset information.


Export All Units

In the Manage Units page, use Export All Units


593 to export all of your units to an Excel file. When

exporting data, and the export is complete, you can save the file from the current browser page. A download message appears for saving the file. The message you see varies and depends on the browser and version of the browser in use. Open the spreadsheet to review your data in the #U# and #S# tabs.


Export All Units


Export All Units - Example



Export Data Entry

In Review & Edit, you can select a Base Dataset and a component in Data Entry


145 , and then export that

data to an Excel spreadsheet creating a spreadsheet template for the specified component. You can make

changes to the data in the template and import 598 that data into the originating data entry page or a different

dataset's data entry page. Also, you can export the data to create a backup of the data as a security

measure. To ensure the file can be restored export the categories 598 in Administration, as well.


To export data from a data entry page to create a worksheet template for import and data backup purposes:

  1. Click in the Data Entry ribbon and the Export Components dialog box opens.

    Export - Data Entry


  2. Type the filename.


Export Components


2. Click . The system creates a file that you can use to import data for the page. For example, exporting the PTBI page creates the #PTBI# sheet in which you can use to enter data and then import that data.


Note: In Review & Edit, you can click to export data for informational purposes. You can export data from the Summary page, Lead Sheet pages, and Data Entry pages. This file cannot be used as a template to import data into the system.




To review the progress of the export, select Jobs


551

in the navigation bar.


See Exporting 593 for more information about exporting dataset data.


You have the ability to export component entries from a component's page. It's a good idea to export data on a scheduled basis to create a back up file of your data. You can use the export functionality to create a template for importing data.


Export Categories

It may be valuable to export the categories listed in the system at any given time. These exports can work as a backup method to secure data, as well as shorten the amount of time it takes to do a mass edit. When Exporting categories you are asked two questions: Do you want to export Unit Component? and Do you want to export User Component information?. You can select Yes or No to either question. Keep in mind that there are typically many lines of data on the #CUC# and #CUNC# sheets, so selecting Yes for either of these options dramatically increases the size of the file and the time it takes to generate.


Tax Basis/Return Mapping items can be exported to an Import Return Maps template. In Administration > Manage Tax Basis/ Return select Export Mappings. This creates a file with two sheets: #MBAL# Map Balance Sheet Mappings and #MINC# Map Income Statement. Exporting before items have been entered generates a blank Import Return Maps template.


In Administration > Export Categories you can export the categories listed in the system at any given time.


To export categories:

  1. Select Administration and then Export Categories. The Export Categories dialog box opens.

    Administration - Export Categories


  2. Type the filename and answer the export questions.


    Export Categories


  3. Click .


To review the progress of the export, select Jobs

Export Bridge Mappings


551

in the navigation bar.

You can export Bridge Mapping data to create an Import Bridge Map template. Exporting from the application before you enter data generates a blank Import Bridge Map template.


The export generates a template with the following worksheets.

167 -


Data Entry - NOL Temp Diffs


Scenarios

This section contains scenarios that show how various settings in the Federal NOL automation affect the NOL Reclass, the Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL), and the NOL Ending Balance.


Select the following scenarios to see various calculations.


Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4 Scenario 5 Scenario 6 Scenario 7 Scenario 8 Scenario 9 Scenario 10


610


611


612


613


614


615


616


617


618


619


Note: Use reporting to see the NOL Automation detail by selecting Reporting > Dataset > Report Level. Click Tax Provision > Options > Detail (in the View list) > Run. In the report, select a hyperlink to see the lower level detail.



Scenario 1

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is the sum of 100% of the Federal Taxable Income (-2,048,000), NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0).

(2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> * 100%<NOL Allow Rate>) + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = -(1,024,000)<NOL Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.

2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -2,048,000 <NOL reclass> = 0 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (5,000,000 <BBal> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O>) + (-2,048,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 2,952,000 <EB>



Scenario 2

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 50% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is the sum of 50% of the Federal Taxable Income, NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0). (2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> * 50%<NOL Allowance Rate>) + 0<DO> + 0<Bal O> = -(1,024,000)<NOL

Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 1,024,000.

2,048,000<TI Pre-NOL> + -1,024,000 <NOL Reclass> = 1,024,000 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal) 5,000,000 <BBal> + -1,024,000 <NOL Reclass> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = 3,976,000<EB>



Scenario 3

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 0% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 50,000, the NOL Reclass is the sum of the Base NOL Allowance (50,000), NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0).

50,000 <Base NOL Allowance> + 0<DO> + 0<Bal O> == - (50,000) <NOL Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 1,998,000.

2,048,000<TI Pre-NOL> + -50,000 <NOL Reclass> = 1,998,00 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal 5,000,000 <BBal> + -50,000<NOL Reclass> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = 4,950,000<EB>



Scenario 4

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 50% and Base NOL Allowance is set to 100,000, the NOL Reclass is the sum of 50% of the Federal Taxable Income, 50% of the Base NOL Allowance (100,000), NOL Deferred Only (0), and NOL Balance Sheet Only (0).

[(2,048,000 * .50) + (100,000 * .50)] + 0<DO> + 0<Bal O> = -(1,074,000) <NOL Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 974,000.

2,048,000<TI Pre-NOL> + -1,074,000 <NOL Reclass> = 974,000 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal 5,000,000 <BBal> + -1,074,000<NOL Reclass> + 0 <DO> + 0<Bal O> = 3,926,000<EB>



Scenario 5

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 0% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is 0. Therefore, the Federal Taxable Income and NOL Ending Balance are not affected by the NOL Reclass.



Scenario 6

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is 100% of the NOL Beginning Balance (100,000).

100,000 <NOL Beginning Bal> * (100%) NOL Allowance Rate = -(100,000)<NOL Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.

2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -100,000 <NOL reclass> = 1,948,000 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (100,000 <BBal> + 350,000 <DO> + 0<Bal O>) + (-100,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 250,000 <EB>



Note: The NOL Reclass takes the total NOL Beginning Balance because 100% of Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) is greater than the available NOL Deferred Tax Asset.



Scenario 7

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 0, the NOL Reclass is the product of the NOL Beginning Balance (500,000) and the NOL Allowance Rate (100%).

500,000 <NOL Beginning Bal> * 100% <NOL allowance rate>= -(500,000)<NOL Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.

2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -500,000<NOL reclass> = 1,548,000 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (500,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 600,000 <Bal O>) + (-500,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 600,000 <EB>



Note: The NOL Reclass takes the total NOL Beginning Balance because 100% of Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) is greater than the available NOL Deferred Tax Asset.



Scenario 8

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 0% and the Base NOL Allowance is set to 40,000, the NOL Reclass is the total NOL Beginning Balance (10,000), because you cannot use more NOL than you have in the beginning balance.

(10,000 <NOL Beginning Bal> = -(10,000)<NOL Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.

2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -10,000 <NOL reclass> = 2,038,000 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (10,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 0 <Bal O>) + (-10,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 0 <EB>



Note: The NOL Reclass takes the total NOL Beginning Balance because the Base NOL Allowance of the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) is greater than the available NOL Deferred Tax Asset.



Scenario 9

When the NOL Allowance Rate is set to 100%, the Base NOL Allowance to 0, and there is another NOL Temporary Difference with Activity (500,000), the NOL Reclass is the sum of 100% of the Federal Taxable Income (2,048,000.00) and the NOL Temporary Difference (500,000).

[(2,048,000.00) <Federal Taxable Income> + (500,000)< NOL TD>] – 500,000 <NOL TD> = - 2,048,000.00

<NOL Reclass>


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.

2,048,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + -2,048,000 <NOL reclass> = 0 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (7,010,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 0 <Bal O>) + (-2,048,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 4,962,000 <EB>



Scenario 10

When there is a negative Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the NOL Allowance Rate and the Base NOL Allowance do not affect the NOL Reclass. This occurs because the negative Taxable Income is considered a loss and is added to the NOL Balance Sheet.


If the NOL Reclass is added to the Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL), the Federal Taxable Income (Post- NOL) is 0.

-52,000 <TI Pre-NOL> + 52,000 <NOL Reclass> = 0 <TI Post-NOL>


NOL ENDING BALANCE

(Beginning Bal + Deferred Only + Balance Sheet Only) + (NOL Reclass) = NOL End Bal (10,000 <BBal> + 0<DO> + 0 <Bal O>) + (52,000 <NOL Reclass>) = 62,000 <EB>



Current Issues

Currently, there are two issues with the Federal NOL automation:


Note: When using Net Adjustments, you cannot select an Elimination Class or Type.



Unit - Target | Sources

Use Flow-Through Targets and Flow-Through Sources to assign Units, Journal Entry, Factors, and Auto Elim to another unit. Select My Datasets > Units > More > Properties > Flow-Through > Flow-Through Targets or Flow-Through Sources.


Unit Properties - Flow-Through Tab


TARGET

The system transfers calculated data from the Source Unit to the Target Unit data entry fields. For example, PTBI, Permanent Differences, and Temporary Differences.


FACTORS

When the system gets data from the source unit, it applies the individual factors. The system multiplies the balance using the assigned factor before the system adds the result to the target unit results.


Partnership Unit Elimination Unit

The following illustration shows factors for a partnerThe following illustration shows factors for an eliminations

target unit. target unit.



Activity Factor Example

APPLYING FACTORS TO UNITS

The following example depicts three levels. You can have as many levels as desired.



Assign Flow-Through Target Unit

Use the Flow-Through Targets tab to assign a Target Unit to the selected Source Unit. Click Add and select Target Unit, Profile, and Create Auto Elim?, then type a Factor. Enter a Profile Comment as needed.

Flow-Through Targets


Assign Flow-Through Source Unit

Use the Flow-Through Sources tab to assign a Source Unit to the selected Target Unit. Click Add and select Source Unit, Profile, and Create Auto Elim?, then type a Factor. Enter a Profile Comment as needed. The system gets the Source Unit data, applies the factors and then transfers the data to the target unit.


Flow-Through Sources

Calculate Flow-Through - Manually

Use the Calculate action to manually calculate the Flow-Through Factor Results. The system can calculate multiple parent/child relationships and then transfer the data to an assigned unit. After modifying data, recalculate the data. The system deletes all previous data during the re-calculation.

Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results


Activate the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item

Through Factor Results in the Calculate drop-down list.

632 parameter to see Calculate Flow-


Notes:


631 .



Review & Edit

Use Review & Edit to review Flow-Through data source history. Select Review & Edit > Base Dataset - A


In an adjustment row, double-click the Data Source field and the Data Source History page opens to review the source data. You can also review by filtering the Target/Elimination Classes.


Reporting

Use the Flow-Through report for Provision datasets to review the data movement between units. Run the report for the Parent Unit and the report shows, by Target unit, the contributing Source unit(s) and their components and factor information as they relate to that Target unit. The calculated adjustment and an elimination adjustment (if set up) appear as additional line items in the report.


Data in the Target unit (except for the manual adjustments data) is cleared out before processing. Then, you can execute the flow-through factor procedure multiple times resulting in the same answer. The flow-through factor procedure increments the data for each source unit on top of the data in the target unit. If the target numbers do not start at zero, the flow-through factor procedure adds numbers on top of themselves.


For more information Reporting in the Tax Provision online Help.


Jobs

Use Jobs to review the status of your Import/Export jobs. When your import/export job is complete, you can review the See Log information to ensure that no errors occurred to restrict data from being imported.


Dataset Import

Dataset Export


Use the import functionality to transfer data for multiple worksheets or each worksheet separately.



Use the export functionality in My Datasets, or the Data Entry pages to create an Excel file (also known as the Import Numbers template) with the following worksheets.


#PARTH# Flow-Through Header

#PARTD# Flow-Through Detail


#PARTTAG# Flow-Through Tags


Settings

REFRESH APPLICATION

Use Refresh Application to update the application with data added or removed in the system.


APPLICATION LICENSE

Use import to add your application license to the system.

Dataset Parameter

Use the dataset parameter, EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGHCLASSES, to exclude Flow-Through data from a Source dataset. To activate the dataset parameter select My Datasets > More (for Source Dataset) > Dataset Parameters.


Dataset Parameter

Parameter Name

Parame ter

Parameter Function

EXCLUDEFLOWTHROUGHCLASSES

1

To exclude all Flow Through classes for the Target dataset.


Manage Configurations

ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY - FLOW-THROUGH

Use Administration >System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Flow-Through to configure the Flow-Through data transfer.

Advanced Functionality - Flow-Through Parameters

ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY

PARAMETERS

Flow Through



Is Flow-Through Activated? (cannot be changed here)


To activate Flow-Through in Manage Licenses:

  • Feature Code: Type Flow Through.

  • Feature Key: Type the license number.


Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_ENABLE


Automatically Calculate Flow-Through Factors in Reports

To automatically calculate Flow-Through factors and transfer data from one unit to another using a Flow-Through profile. The application transfers the current data in the source unit component upon running a report.

Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUTOCALC


Display the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item

To see the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results option in the Calculate

drop-down list within My Datasets.


Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MANUALCALC


Displays FX Fields

To have the FX fields available for data entry. During Calculations, the system uses the Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx in the Flow-Through Factor page.


Parameter Name: FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE_FX


Allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through

To allow Audit Trail for Flow-Through.


Parameter Name: AUDIT_FLOWTHROUGH


See Calculate Flow-Through Factor


632

for more information about calculating the Flow-Through Factor.


Manage Configurations - Advanced Functionality


System Parameters

.

The following system parameter information appears in your Export/Import Categories template.

Activate the following System Parameters using Manage Configurations

632


Parameter Name

Paramete r

Parameter Function

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE_FX

0 or 1

1 displays the FX fields (Use Fx Rates During Calculations, Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx Rate) on the Flow-Through Factor page.

  • An unknown FX rate forces unknown

    amounts to zero which may or may not be erroneous. If using the automatic calculation, no error message appears letting you know to verify the amounts.

    However, the manual calculation provides a warning (which you can ignore). This warning message provides a list of the units that have an unknown FX rate so you can correct the data.

  • The source unit to target unit Flow-Through

does not calculate, nor store a currency translation adjustment (CTA) in the target unit. The CTA only calculates and appears when going from local currency to reporting currency. The CTA in the target unit report may not match the CTA for the source unit. The correct CTA appears only in the source unit.

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUTOCALC

0 or 1

1 automatically calculates flow-through factors in reports.

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MANUALCALC

0 or 1

1 displays the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item in the Provision and Estimated Payments datasets.

AUDIT_FLOWTHROUGH

0 or 1

1 allows Audit Trail for Flow-Through.

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_ENABLE

0 or 1

1 allows Flow-Through Factors

ENHANCED_FLOW_RPT_PERF

0 or 1

1 Enhances the system performance for the Flow-Through functionality.


Using the Flow-Through functionality with Tag Datasets

To transfer a percentage of data from one unit to another, follow these steps:

  1. Create a Provision or Estimated Payments dataset and apply Tags as the Data Option to the dataset.

  2. Select My Datasets > Dataset (Tag) > Units > More > Flow-Through Factors.

  3. Click Create New to set up Flow-Through to move data from one unit to another.

  4. Select a unit from the Source Unit drop-down list. The calculated data transfers from a source unit to the target unit using the assigned factors. You can select any unit as a source, except for the target unit.

  5. Select a Manual Adjustments tag. You can locate the tag in the target unit where you can make manual adjustments to existing balances. The data in the target unit within the manual adjustments tag is not deleted or zeroed out.

  6. Use Apply Default Factor or type a factor in the field. If you de-select Apply Default Factor, you cannot type in the field.



  7. Select Exclusion Tags (for clearing and copying data). For more information, go to the Data Clearing Details section.


    EXCLUSION TAGS

    An exclusion tag for the target unit keeps existing data for those tags in tact. The system does not delete this data.


    When the system calculates the Flow-Through, the system clears the data in the target unit as the first step. Then, the system transfers the data from the source unit to the target unit.


    EXCLUSION TAGS HAVE TWO FUNCTIONS:

  8. Type a factor in the BEG FX RATE and WGT AVG FX RATE fields. Click the box to remove the default calculation.

    FX RATES

    Use FX Rates during calculations by default. The system uses the Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx Rate for the Flow-Through Factor calculations.


    Using FX works in Flow-Through:

  9. Select the type of data (PTBI, Permanent Differences, etc.) to transfer from the source unit.


    INCLUDE IN COPY

    By selecting a component type (PTBI, Perm Differences, Temp Differences), the system calculates data using the assigned factor from the source unit and transfers it to the target unit. You can determine the level of detail in the target unit by selecting Detail Copy Action or a Target Rollup Component.


  10. Enter an Activity Factor for the selected type of data.



    ACTIVITY FACTORS

    During the transfer of data from the source unit, the system applies the individual factors. For example, if the Temporary Differences Activity factor is set to 50.00%, then the activity of each temporary difference will be multiplied by 50.00% before the result is added to the target units results.


    If a temporary difference was selected, you need to enter a Beginning Balance Activity Factor, Deferred Only Activity Factor, and Balance Sheet Only Activity Factor.


  11. Select a Target Rollup Component a Target Type and Target Tag.


    ROLLUP COMPONENTS


    Target Rollup Components

    When a target rollup component is selected, a target tag must also be selected. When you select a target rollup component and target tag for a component type, the system summarizes all detail items together. The results appear in the selected component/tag in the target unit.


    Target Type | TargetTag

    If you select a ONESOURCE Tax Provision component, then you must select a target tag for each type. The target tag determines where the data appears in the target unit.

    You have two options for copying data from the source unit to the target unit: Copy Detail by Tag and

    Summarize Detail by Tag.


    Rollup Temporary Differences

    The target temporary difference defaults to unit rates:


    COPY DETAIL BY TAG

    The system copies each component/tag combination from the source unit to the target. Use the tag on the target unit to make manual adjustments to existing numbers. The system does not delete the data in the target unit within the manual adjustments tag.

    If data exits in the target unit for a component/tag combination, the system overwrites the information unless you define the target tag in the Exclude Clearing the Data for These Tags option within the Target Unit list. When the system includes data for the Exclude list, the data increments on top of the data that already exists. If you run the flow-through calculation process more than once, the source data increments on top of itself with each run.

    Caution: If the system does not clear the existing data in the target unit, first, and a tag is selected for both exclude from clearing and summarized, its detail in the target unit is deleted as an override to the clearing tag exclusion. The summarize tag designation takes priority over the clearing exclusion. The system prompts you message when this occurs, however, the system is not prevented from clearing the data.


    COPY DETAIL BY TAG

    Each component/tag combination from the source unit is copied to the target:


    TARGET ROLLUP COMPONENT: COPY DETAIL BY TAG



    If data exits in the target unit for a component/tag combination, it will be overwritten unless the target tag is defined on the Exclude Clearing the Data for These Tags on the Target Unit list. When data is included on the Exclude list, it will be incremented on top of the data that already exists. This is undesirable if the flow- through calculation process is to be run more than once because the source data will increment on top of itself on each run.


    COPY AND SUMMARIZE

    Data is cleared from the target unit as the first step. Then data is copied from the source unit to the target unit. There are two options for copying data from the source unit to the target unit: Copy Detail by Tag and Summarize Detail by Tag.


    SUMMARIZE DETAIL BY TAG

    Each component from the source unit is summarized into the Summarization Tag before it is copied to the target:


    TARGET ROLLUP COMPONENT: SUMMARIZE DETAIL BY TAG



    Note: All data for the X tag will be deleted prior to processing.


  12. To manually or automatically calculate the Flow Through data and transfer the data from one unit to another.

  1. Manually by clicking Dataset > Administration > Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results. The following message displays: Are you sure you would like to calculate unit factor results? WARNING: This will erase all data not tagged with the 'Manual Adjustments Tag' and 'Exclusion Tags' in each target unit. Click Yes.

  2. Automatically during the report data regeneration process.



BEST PRACTICES

A given component type will only use one of the three detail copy types with the following order of precedence:


Terminology

The following terminology for Flow-Through includes:


SOURCE UNIT

The unit from which numbers are pulled. Factors are applied to source unit data before it is written to the target unit. You can designate multiple source units. Data from all source units is added by the system. The result is placed in the target unit.


TARGET UNIT

The unit to which numbers are pushed or written.


TARGET TAG

Determines where data is written in the target unit.


TARGET CLASSES

Determines where data is written in the target unit.


MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS TAG

A target unit tag allowing users to make manual adjustments to existing numbers. Data in the target unit in the manual adjustments tag is not deleted or zeroed out.


EXCLUSION CLEARING TAG

A target unit tag specifying that existing data should not be deleted or cleared out. You can designate one or more exclusion clearing tags.


EXCLUSION PULLING TAG

A source unit tag specifying that existing data should not be pulled. You can designate one or more exclusion pulling tags.


COMPONENT TYPE

A type of data that can be copied from source unit to target unit. (Examples: PTBI, permanent differences, temporary differences) A component type rolls all detail into a Target Rollup Component. Then the detail is either copied or summarized by tag.


Note: The data for a component type that is not selected is not changed; it is not deleted, zeroed out, or copied (factored).



ACTIVITY FACTOR

A percentage applied to source unit numbers before they are written to a target unit. Factors can be positive or negative. For example, if the Temporary Differences factor is set to 50%, the activity of each temporary difference is multiplied by 50% and the result is added to the target unit.


INCLUDE IN COPY

Designated component types for which data from the source unit is copied and factored into the target unit. The level of detail in the target unit is determined by the Detail Copy Action option selected or if a Target Rollup Component is selected.


Foreign Currency Issues

Each unit is designated a currency type


643, as well as exchange rates that are used to convert the unit's

local currency information to reporting currency. Enter 1 for the exchange rate if the local and reporting currency are the same currency.


In converting currency, there are several potential issues that can occur. The Pre-Tax Book Income (PTBI)

provided may be converted at different exchange rates. On a unit basis, the PTBI policy 108 can be selected

so that the correct exchange rate is used to convert. The interplay of the Weighted Average and Spot rates

may require that a Currency Translation Adjustment 644 (CTA) be posted to account for the difference in

rates. The system automatically posts the CTA as an equity adjustment to the deferred tax asset/liability.


There is only one reporting currency concept in the system. This allows the combination of units in sub- consolidated or consolidated reports in the reporting currency view. The local currency view of the report may not make sense unless all units have the same currency.


Currency Types and Options

CONCEPTS

Currency Types


Setup

This section describes the setup involved for all three options.

Option 1

Option 1 does not require any setup. The system automatically calculates CTA when applicable.

Option 2 - Alternative CTA

To enable the Alternative CTA calculation, you must add the dataset parameter to the system. Select My Datasets > More > Dataset Parameters.


Enter the following information. Parameter Name: CTA_ALT_CALC Parameter Type: Alphanumeric Parameter Value: 1

Option 3- Alternative CTA

Option 3 lets you manually enter CTA calculations.


First you must add the system parameter SHOW_CTA with the value 1. Select Administration > System >

Manage Restricted Features.


Next, select a Provision dataset, click My Datasets > Units > More > Other. You can enter your CTA data manually in the Add’l CTA (Reporting) page.



Scenarios

This section contains scenarios for each option.

Option 1 - Scenario A

The first option for CTA is an existing feature that does not require additional setup for it to function. Only temporary differences are used for the example. However, the CTA calculation takes all types of adjustments into consideration.


UNIT TAX RATES ARE THE SAME

If there are differences in the Weighted Average FX Rate, Beginning FX Rate, and Ending FX Rate, a CTA adjustment must be made for all temporary differences.


Option 1 - Scenario A Reports

The CTA is in the Tax Provision report. It is used to calculate the Deferred Tax Provision.


EXPANDED B/S


The CTA calculation can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (cir expanded b/s).


EXPANDED I/S

The CTA calculation can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (expanded i/s).

Note: You can set corresponding relationships between tag letters and report columns by selecting

Administration > System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.



Option 1 - Scenario B

UNIT TAX RATES ARE DIFFERENT

If there are differences in the Weighted Average FX Rate, Beginning FX Rate, and Ending FX Rate, a CTA adjustment must be made for all temporary differences.

Note: Only temporary differences are used for example. However, the CTA calculation takes all types of temporary differences into consideration.


Option 1 - Scenario B Reports

The CTA is in the Tax Provision report. It is used to calculate the Deferred Tax Provision.


EXPANDED B/S

The CTA calculation can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (cir expanded b/s).


EXPANDED I/S

In the Expanded I/S report, you can view the impact of the CTA through Activity, the Deferred Rate Change, the Rate Difference between Current and Deferred, and Deferred Only Adjustments.


Option 2 - Scenario A

To enable the Alternative CTA calculation, the dataset parameter CTA_ALT_CALC must be entered by selecting the Provision dataset and clicking Data Input > Dataset > Administration > Dataset Parameters.


All calculations and deferred report data for the CTA amount are the same as for Option 1. However, the placement of the CTA amount is before the Return Basis Provision in the Tax Provision report.


Example: Unit Tax Rates are the Same


Option 2 - Scenario A Tax Provision Reports

The yellow highlighted area is where the CTA amount will be located after you add the dataset parameter CTA_ALT_CALC.


Option 2 - Scenario B

Example: Unit Tax Rates are Different


Option 2 - Scenario B Tax Provision Reports

The yellow highlighted area is where the CTA amount will be located after you add the dataset parameter CTA_ALT_CALC.


Option 3 - Scenario A

ADDITIONAL CTA

First, add the SHOW_CTA system parameter in Manage Configurations


481 . Next, select a Provision

dataset, click My Datasets > Units > More > Other. You can enter your CTA data manually in the Add’l CTA (Reporting) page.



The SHOW_CTA parameter also automatically generates an After-Tax Temporary Difference labeled CTA_SYS. The information entered in the Additional CTA will show up as an After-Tax Temporary Difference.


Option 3 - Scenario A Reports

The Additional CTA amount can be viewed in the Tax Provision report under After-Tax Temporary Differences. This amount is created using the system-generated After-Tax Temporary Difference CTA_SYS. EXPANDED B/S

Additional CTA information can be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (expanded b/s).


EXPANDED I/S

Additional CTA information can also be viewed in the Deferred Balances Report (expanded i/s).


Note: You can modify column names for the Deferred Balances Report (expanded b/s) by selecting the Administration section and clicking System > Manage Deferred Rollforwards.



Error Handling

If SHOW_CTA is deactivated and data was entered in the Additional CTA, CTA values will still show up in the Tax Provision, Deferred Balances (expanded b/s), and Deferred Balances (expanded i/s) reports. Additional CTA data must be deleted for CTA values not to show up in the reports.


Interim Reporting

The Interim dataset facilitates the collection of data and the computation of the Provision during the interim

period. Using an Interim Dataset 406, you can produce the provision for the first three-quarters of the year.

The system separates the data into two data entry areas - Forecast

663 and Actual

667 .



INTERIM FORECAST STATE RATE

You can calculate the forecast state rate two ways. The designation is made by using the

USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE dataset parameter 57 with a paramvalue of 0 or 1.

  1. The system uses pre-tax book income that includes only units with an active state record if you set the dataset Parameter Value to 0.

    Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE

    Parameter Value: 0


  2. The system uses pre-tax book income that includes the pre-tax book income of all units, regardless of whether it has an active or inactive state record if you set the Parameter Value to 1.

Parameter Name: USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE

Parameter Value: 1


Note: The dataset parameter USE_WWPTBI_STATEFCRATE applies to both Reporting and Reporting (Legacy) reports.



Journal Entries

The Journal Entry functionality includes general concepts, Journal Entry Reports and Journal Entry setup.


Although, the functionality is similar, the difference between Journal Entry Configuration and Journal Entry Profile is where you set up and maintain your journal entries in the application.


Note: You activate the Configurable JE report by selecting Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries > Enable Configurable Journal Entry.


Journal Entry Profiles


  1. Use Journal Entry Profiles to manage your journal entries at the dataset level for multiple units by selecting My Datasets > More > Journal Entry Profiles.

    For each dataset, Journal Entry Profiles lets you

  2. Use Profile Definition, Journal Lines, and Assigned Units tabs to set up your journal entry profiles.


Note: You Import/Export JE profiles in the My Datasets page.



Journal Entry Profile Tabs

  1. Use the Profile Definition to select classes for the Journal Entry Profile. You can choose to include all classes, or one or more classes to isolate specific journal entry calculations.

  2. Use Journal Lines to set up the Journal Entry lines.

  3. Use Assigned Units to assign units to the Journal Entry Profiles.


Journal Lines

  1. Use Journal Lines to Add, Delete, and Copy journal entry lines.

  2. Use Journal Lines to determine the JE Type, JE Code, JE Summary, Name (Description), Debit Account, and Credit Account.



GL SOURCES

Lets you assign account balances from Trial Balance data that is populated in the application (typically by the bridge import). You can consider amounts previously booked in tax accounts, for prior quarters, when provision data is on a year-to-date basis. The system creates a journal entry for the incremental amount to be booked.


Tax Calculations & GL Sources


  1. Use Tax Calculations to filter calculations by group and view the tax calculation list.

  2. Use GL Sources to determine the account balances from Trial Balance data.


    Assigned Units

    Use Assigned Units to add one or more units to journal entry profiles. Journal Entries are assigned on a unit


    by unit basis.


    UNIT ASSIGNMENT

    Allows for assignment of one or more units to each profile

UNIT LEVEL JOURNAL ENTRIES

  1. The previous iteration of the JE functionality.

  2. Unlike the Profile where you can just assign units, the Unit Level JE exists in every unit within My Datasets > Units > More > Journal Entries.

  3. Your unit can only have one or the other: Unit assigned to JE Profile or Unit Level JE configurations.

  4. The Data Entry section is the same as the JE profile JE line creation.

  5. The import sheets are different from Profile sheets and exist just before the profile sheets in a numbers export.

  6. Can be used with both Tags and Class Datasets.



    Note: Each unit can have either Journal Entry profiles (Dataset level) or Unit Journal Entry configurations (Unit level), not both. When assigning a unit to a Journal Entry Profile at the "Dataset" level, if that unit has journal entries defined at the "Unit" level, a message appears letting you know that, if you continue, the journal entry configurations at the unit level will be permanently deleted.



    Journal Entries System Parameters

    ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY

    You can activate the parameters in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Journal Entries.

Journal Entries Parameters


REPORTING

A rounding system parameter for reports lets you see the same balance for the JE tax calculation and the deferred. To create JE reports with rounded numbers after summation, select Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Reporting > Other > Calculate Reports using alternate rounding > Yes.

Note: Only Administrators are able to turn on this functionality.



Additional Configuration Options

FILTERS

Deferred Provision, Balance Sheet Only Adjustments, and Ending Deferred Balance calculations can be isolated and grouped based on filters. Up to nine filters can be created. Each filter applies to both federal and the related state amounts. In addition to the use of filters, you can configure journal entries by adding or subtracting components or by using rollups.

The system parameters JE_FILTER#, with a paramvalue of a Temporary Difference Code, and JE_FILTER_NAME#, with a paramvalue of the filter group name, need to be activated to use filters. Filters add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen. The Base filter group contains the amount left over after all filters have been applied.

The system parameter JE_COMPONENT_ROLLUP_SET_CODE, with a paramvalue of the component rollup

set code of the rollup group, needs to be activated to use rollups. (Use the Manage Rollups 536 screen to

create rollup sets and groups.) Rollup groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen.


TAG GROUPS

Deferred Provision, Balance Sheet Only Adjustments, Ending Deferred Balance, and Payable calculations can be isolated and grouped based on tags. Up to nine tag groups can be created. Each tag group applies to both federal and the related state amounts.

The system parameters JE_TAG_GROUP_#_NAME, with a paramvalue of the tag group name, and JE_TAG_GROUP_#_TAGS, with a paramvalue of a group of tags separated by commas, need to be activated to use tag groups. Tag groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen.


GAAP TO STAT / STAT TO TAX

Deferred Provision, Balance Sheet Only Adjustments, and Ending Deferred Balance calculations can be isolated and grouped based on the GAAP to Stat and Stat to Tax breakout. The GAAP to Stat and Stat to Tax breakout applies to both federal and the related state amounts.


STATE GROUPS

You can group similar states together, based on their common general ledger accounts. Up to nine state groups can be created.

The system parameters JE_STATE_GROUP_NAME_#, with a paramvalue of the state group name, and JE_STATE_GROUP_%_STATE##, with a paramvalue of a state code, need to be activated to use state groups. State groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries screen.


Journal Entry Standard Reports

Journal Entry reports can be viewed on a single unit, filing group, sub-consolidated or consolidated basis (if the local currency is the same). All users can view the Journal Entry reports.

To access the Journal Entry reports, select Reporting > Journal Entry > Output Journal Entries.


ONESOURCE Tax Provision Reports are self-reconciling, and some tax calculation balances, in Output Journal Entry Reports, will tie back to other reports using the correct filters, for example, Tax Provision and Deferred Balances.


OUTPUT JE – BASE (UNIT SUMMARY AND UNIT DETAIL, FG DETAIL)

This report will yield all calculated JE values based on Debit/Credit “GL Account” designation within the profile. It will list as many Journal Lines as you have created and show the value under the Debit or Credit column based on whether the balances net to positive or negative (Debit = Positive, Credit = Negative).

Unit Summary will net all units in the consolidated, sub-consolidated report level. Unit Detail will break lines out by unit.

FG Detail report will net values across the FG parent and child units. You will not see a breakout of units on this report, just the parent unit.


OUTPUT JE – JE BY GL ACCOUNT

This report will net the GL account values from the Output JE Base report, regardless of jurisdiction. The total of this report may not match the Base due to the way the numbers net together. For example, two GL Accounts with a Debit balance net with a GL Account that has a Credit Balance can net to a Debit or Credit designation.


OUTPUT JE – JE BY GL ACCOUNT (BY LOCALITY, BY UNIT, BY UNIT AND LOCALITY)

By Locality: this report will respect jurisdictions and separate the JE Base report into Federal and State. By Unit (available in consolidated or sub-consolidation): Each unit section should tie back to the unit level report for the JE by GL account since this report just combines those individual reports and displays them together.

By Unit and Locality (available in consolidated or sub-consolidation): This report will give you the JE by GL account (by Locality) for each unit.


OUTPUT JE CALCULATION DETAIL (UNIT SUMMARY AND UNIT DETAIL)

Book values come from Trial Balance Tax Basis data entry screen. These are the GL sources specified in the Profile.

Tax values are calculated based on tax calculations in JE Profile.

The most detailed Output JE that will give you information on the JE Profile associated with the Locality, GL Account, JE Profile, Journal Line Code and Name, the Locality, Book or Tax designation, and Amounts).


OUTPUT JE – JE SUMMARY BY GL ACCOUNT

Similar to the JE by GL account, this report utilizes the JE Summary field in the JE Profile Journal Lines setup to breakout JE reports further.


OUTPUT JE – JE SUMMARY BY GL ACCOUNT (BY LOCALITY)

Similar to the JE by GL account (by Locality) report, this report will net values between Fed and State, while still breaking out the report by JE Summary.


OUTPUT JE – EXPORT DETAIL

This report is the same as the JE Base (unit detail) with extra details from the JE Profile Line including supplemental data, an audit trail of when the JE was created, and details of whether any system, dataset, or


unit-dataset parameters are associated with the line.


OUTPUT JE – CONFIGURATION DETAIL

This report details the JE Profile configuration details regarding the number of JE lines, number of Tax Calculations, number of GL sources (book), and whether a unit is assigned to the JE profile in question. Best report to validate across Reporting Datasets as this report gives you a dataset column.


JOURNAL ENTRY SUPPORT REPORT

This report summarizes Tax Calculations and Book GL Source values with acronyms.


Example of Journal Entry Data - Support for a complex set of Tax Accounts

Example of Journal Entry Data - Support for a complex set of Tax Accounts

Unit Code

Account Number

Account Description

Book Value

Tax Provision Value

Adjustment

Income Statement






A1000

123001

Current Tax Expense

1,800,000

2,006,900

206,900

A1000

123009

Current Tax Expense for Equity

0

0

0

A1000

123002

Deferred Tax Expense (Current)

-100,000

-175,000

-75,000

A1000

123003

Deferred Tax Expense (Non- Current)


0

0

Balance Sheet: Assets






A1000

123001

Deferred Tax Assets (Current)

65,800

175,000

109,200

A1000

123012

Deferred Tax Assets (Non-Current)

0

0

0


Example - Journal Entry Calculations

CURRENT PROVISION JOURNAL ENTRY



Debits

Credits

Current Tax Expense

1,593,725


Taxes Payable


1,593,725


JOURNAL ENTRY CALCULATION (B/S)



DEFERRED TAX PROVISION



Deferred Tax Asset/Liability

Debits

207,813

Credits

Deferred Tax Expense


207,813



JOURNAL ENTRY CALCULATION (I/S)



TOTAL DEFERRED PROVISION



Deferred Tax Asset/Liability

Debits

207,813

Credits

Deferred Tax Expense


207,813



DEFERRED PROVISION JOURNAL ENTRY (I/S APPROACH)


DEFERRED PROVISION JOURNAL ENTRY

(B/S APPROACH)

Total Ending Balances 17,857,028


enter activity for any date, activate the system parameter 758 , Adjust Payable Date Range.

Activating the Adjust Payable Date Range removes the date restriction and allows data entry in the Payable with dates that are outside the dataset period. For example, you can enter data in a 2016 full year dataset with dates that are outside 1/1/2016 to 12/31/2016.


PAYABLE REPORTING

Use the two payable report types: Payable Rollforward

335 and Payable Detail

337. Each report shows the

payable information in a different format and has various views to adjust the report's format.


Payable Functionality System Parameters


See Payable Settings 79

Summary.

for information about assigning Transaction Types to a Custom Tab for the Payable


Exchange Rates

The system computes the Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) on a transaction-by-transaction basis using a transaction's Weighted Average FX rate and the Unit’s Ending Spot rate. Use the Payable Summary Entry page to add your data by selecting My Datasets > More > Payable Summary Entry.


Note: If the dataset parameter PAYRECTYPE is missing or contains an invalid value, the system automatically inputs a value of 1.



Unit Dataset Parameter

When you need to reclass a unit’s auto-generated payable transactions to a parent unit, add the unit dataset

parameter 106. You add the parameter in every child unit for which the payable is to be reclassed.


To add the unit dataset parameter select My Datasets > Units > More > Unit Dataset Parameters.

  1. Type PAYRECUNIT for the Parameter Name.

  2. Select Alphanumeric as the Parameter Type.

  3. Select the Unit Code(Parent) for Parameter Value.


Unit State Dataset Parameter


When you need to reclass a unit’s auto-generated payable transactions to a parent unit at the state level,

add the unit dataset parameter reclassed.

135 . You add the parameter in every child unit for which the payable is to be


To add parameters in Unit State Dataset Parameters select My Datasets > Units > Fed/State > Unit State Dataset Parameters.

  1. Type PAYRECUNIT for the Parameter Name.

  2. Select Alphanumeric for the Parameter Type.

  3. Select the Unit Code(Parent) for Parameter Value.


Note: It is possible to reclassify many units to a single target unit. For example, you can reclassify units A, B and C to unit X. The reclassification payable transaction entries in the target unit X represents the aggregation of all the reclassification's from each of A, B and C.



Posting the Payable Reclass

After setting up the Payable Reclass, the system posts the provision in the child unit


27. Review the

provision amounts originally posted at the child level for accuracy. Then, select My Datasets > Calculate >

Recalc Payable Reclasses. Recalc Payable Reclasses


The reclass uses similar (but different) transaction types to move amounts between entities:

Provision Reclass

CPROV CPROV-REC

RTP RTP-REC

ATR ATR-REC

OTHER OTHER-REC


The system transfers the provision posting from the child to the parent character from the original posting. Also,

27 , keeping the year level and


  1. Select Manage Payable Txn Types and then Code.

  2. Next, type the Code, the Name and then select the Rollup code.


Manage Payable Txn Types


Example: Reclass on Payable Rollforward



OUTSIDE OF DATASET YEARS

The default configuration when using the Payable module assumes that the user is a calendar year taxpayer and that payments and transactions are limited to the current year or period. The system designates the current year and current period by using the settings assigned when creating the dataset. For example, if you create a dataset as a 2015 Full Year Dataset, the system does not let you to enter transactions with a date of 1 January 2016 or greater. If the dataset is a 2016 First Quarter dataset, you can enter transactions between 1 January 2016 and 31 March 2016.


To enable greater flexibility when using the Payable Reclass functionality, you can deactivate this constraint and enter or import data outside the dataset ranges. To disable the time constraint, activate the system parameter in Administration > System > Manage Configurations > Advanced Functionality > Payable

.


394



Dataset Relations


See Importing Categories

589 and Spreadsheet Import


556

for more information about that functionality.


Activation

Activate the RTP posting by setting up the Dataset Relations for a Return dataset. Then, the RTP posting, Post Ret-to-Prov, option appears only in the dataset designated as the Return dataset.


  1. Select My Datasets > Dataset (designated as the Return Dataset in Manage Relations) > Calculate

  2. Choose which units to post the Return to Provision Adjustments in the Related Current Provision (RTP Target).


Post Return to Provision


Return to Provision Posting


Post RTP


Setup

This section covers the general setup of dataset relations. The major steps are:


  1. Creating datasets for the previous year Provision, previous year Return, and Current Provision.

  2. Selecting the Return, Provision, and Target datasets.

  3. Creating tax adjustments.


Creating Datasets

To create datasets for the previous year Provision, previous year Return, and Current Provision:

Note: The following Dataset information is used only as an example.



PREVIOUS YEAR PROVISION

Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets > Add.


Set up a dataset for the prior year provision:

  1. Type the Dataset Name: 2016 Provision.

  2. Select the Type: PROV.

  3. Select the Fiscal Year: 2016.

  4. Select the Fiscal Period: FY.

  5. Type the Group Tax Rate: 35.00.

  6. For Transaction, select Copy.

  7. For Apply, select Tags or Classes & Subclasses.

  8. For the Source Dataset, select the dataset to copy.

  9. For the Prior Period Dataset, select a dataset.

  10. Select the items to copy.

  11. Click Save.


PREVIOUS YEAR RETURN

Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets > Add.


Set up a dataset for the prior year return:

  1. Type the Dataset Name: 2016 Return.

  2. Select the Type: PROV.

  3. Select the Fiscal Year: 2016.

  4. Select the Fiscal Period: FY.

  5. Type the Group Tax Rate: 35.00.

  6. For Transaction, select Copy.

  7. For Apply, select Tags or Classes & Subclasses.

  8. For the Source Dataset, select the dataset to copy.

  9. For the Prior Period Dataset, select a dataset.

  10. Select the Copy Items.

  11. Click Save.


CURRENT PROVISION

Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets > Add.


Set up a dataset for the current year provision:

  1. Type the Dataset Name: 2017 Provision.

  2. Select the Type: PROV.

  3. Select the Fiscal Year: 2017.

  4. Select the Fiscal Period: FY.

  5. Type the Group Tax Rate: 35.00.

  6. For Transaction, select Rollover.

  7. For Apply, select Tags or Classes & Subclasses.

  8. For the Source Dataset, select the dataset to copy.

  9. For the Prior Period Dataset, select a dataset.

  10. Select the items to Include From Source Dataset.

  11. Click Yes for the message "Do you wish to refresh the report data?"

  12. Click Save.


Dataset Relations

To releate the Return, Provision, and Target datasets:


  1. Select Administration > Manage Datasets > Datasets.

  2. Select the 2016 Return dataset and click the edit icon.

  3. Select Dataset Relations.

  4. Select 2016 Provision in the RTP Provision drop-down list. (The Provision dataset must be from the current or a prior period.)

  5. Select 2017 Current Provision in the RTP Target drop-down list. (The Target dataset must be from the current period or a future period.)


Manage Datasets

The mapping

Datasets.

409 for Dataset Relations is in Administration > Manage Datasets > Manage Active

Select the dataset (for which Dataset Relations were created), from the Dataset drop-down list. The RTP Provision is listed in the Equiv column and the RTP Target will be listed in the Next column.


Creating Tax Adjustments

Add Non-cash tax adjustments manually before generating the RTP posting.


To create Non-cash tax adjustments:

  1. Select Administration > Administration > Manage Units > Tax Adjustments.

  2. Create a Non-Cash Tax Adjustment for Permanent Differences and one for Temporary Differences using the following format (with the appropriate year): NC_RTP_YYYY_PERM and NC_RTP_YYYY_TEMP. In this example, NC_RTP_2016_PERM and NC_RTP_20162_TEMP are created.


    Note: If non-cash tax adjustments do not exist in the system, the RTP posting fails.



    Non-Cash Tax Adjustments

    When you select the Post Ret-to-Prov 50 menu option, the system automatically calculates the differences

    between the 2015 Provision and 2015 Return and generates them in the 2016 Current Provision as Non-Cash Tax Adjustments to true-up the Current Provision.


    When the Post Ret-to-Prov menu option is selected, the system automatically calculates the differences between the 2012 Provision and 2012 Return and generates them on the 2013 Current Provision as Non- Cash Tax Adjustments to true-up the Current Provision. The true-up is separated into two non-cash tax adjustments:



In addition, NC_2013_PERM and NC_2013_TEMP must be in the system for State Non-Cash Adjustments to be posted:


  1. Select Administration and then Manage States.

  2. Select State Tax Adjustments.

  3. Type a Non-Cash Tax Adjustment for Permanent Differences; use the following format (with the appropriate year), NC_RTP_YYYY_PERM.

  4. Type a Non-Cash Tax Adjustment for Temporary Differences; use the following format (with the appropriate year), NC_RTP_YYYY_TEMP.


Note: If Federal and State Tax Adjustment codes in the system, the following error message appears

Posting the True-Up Adjustments requires the following Unit and State Tax Adjustment Codes be


added: NC_RTP_YYYY_Temp, NC_RTP_YYYY_Perm.



Dataset Parameters

RTPTAG AND DORTPTAG

The system uses tags to designate RTP Deferred Only adjustments when you add the RTPTAG and DORTPTAG dataset parameters. In the 2016 Current Provision, the system tags the true-ups with the dataset parameters RTPTAG (Tag: X) and DORTPTAG (Tag: Z) from the 2015 Return.

Select My Datasets > Provision Dataset > Return Dataset > More > Dataset Parameters.


In order for the system to distinguish the 2016 Temporary Difference True-ups from the 2017 Temporary Difference True-ups, the tags for the Dataset Parameters HOLDSRTP_2016 and HOLDSDORTP_2016 must be different from the HOLDSRTP_2017 and HOLDSDORTP_2017 tags.


  1. Enter the following:

  2. Enter the following:


Converting from Aggregated to Aggregated Post-Tax

Converting from the Aggregated Attribute to Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis:


  1. Change the paramvalue for the VA_CALCTYPE dataset parameter from 2 to 4.

  2. Export your data to create an Import Template. You can also save this file to create a back up of your data prior to changing it.

  3. In Reports, select a report and then Run. The program computes the automation amounts for Valuation Allowances on an Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax method and then generates an updated report.

  4. You can re-import your Beginning Balances for Valuation Allowances, if necessary.


    Note: If you need to convert from the Aggregated Attribute to Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis, please

    contact your client manager or Support

    15.



    Associated ONESOURCE Tax Provision Applications

the support 15 group.


Reference Items

This section provides you with reference items for components, parameters and other information to help with completing your provision processes.

Data Table

You can use the Data Table buttons to view specific data for each page in the grid.


Data Table Options



Use to maximize the space on the page.



Use to change the comparison from Column to Side by Side view. All Datasets and Datasets are grouped together.



Use to change the percentage from % to $ amount.



Use to change the currency from Local to Reporting.



Use to turn on and off the grid filters. The grid filters let you define which data will appear in the grid so you can review specific data.



Use to hide various columns. For example, you can hide the columns so that you see only the Effective Tax Rate column.


The following screenshots let you see the Data Table buttons and actions available as you navigate from one page to another in the application.


My Dataset Grid


Manage Units Grid


Review & Edit Summary Grid


Review & Edit Summary Grid - Comparing Data


Leadsheet Grid - Comparing Data


Data Entry Grid


Resize Columns

Position the curser over the border of the column and drag the border to adjust the column width.


Filter Data

You can filter data for one or more columns in the grid. Filtered data shows only the information that meet the criteria that you specify and hides information that you do not want displayed. By default, the filter functionality is turned on. To turn the filter off, click the filter button.


To determine if a filter is applied, note the icon in the column heading:




To filter or search for a specific value in a column:

Point to the column header and click the to see the options in the drop-down list. The options include: Ascending, Descending, Filter by Condition, Filter by Value, Search, Select All and Blank. The options vary according to the type of data in the column.


To enter filter criteria:

  1. Select Filter by Condition and the filter options appear.

  2. Select the conditions in the fields and then click Apply.

  3. To restore the entire grid, click Clear Filter.



    You can select the options in the Filter to control the list that you see in the dataset grid. You can filter and search the lists to reduce the length of the list.

Dataset Filter


Sort Data

Click the column name to sort its data in ascending order. Click again to sort in descending order. By default, data is sorted in descending order.


Hide and Show Columns

To show columns in a grid, click the Settings button and a list of columns appears. The list that appears depends on which page you have open at the time. By default, all columns in the list will show in the grid. Clear the check box next to the column name to hide it from the grid. The grid updates instantly using the selections you made in the list. To revert to the default grid, select all of the column names.


Data Entry - Perm Diffs - Tax Basis Page


List of Columns


You can select the options in the Settings drop-down list to control the columns that you see in the dataset grid.

Dataset Grid Settings


Reorder Columns

Drag any column header to the left or right to reorder the grid.


Group Columns

Drag any column header to the area above the headers to group data in the grid.


739


State and Jurisdiction Codes

State

Code

State

Code

Alabama

AL

Montana

MT

Alaska

AK

Nebraska

NE

All Other

AO

Nevada

NV

Arizona

AZ

New Hampshire

NH

Arkansas

AR

New Jersey

NJ

Blended State

BS

New Mexico

NM

California

CA

New York

NY

Colorado

CO

New York City

NYC

Connecticut

CT

North Caroline

NC

Delaware

DE

North Dakota

ND

Florida

FL

Ohio

OH

Georgia

GA

Oklahoma

OK

Hawaii

HI

Oregon

OR

Idaho

ID

Pennsylvania

PA

Illinois

IL

Rhode Island

RI

Indiana

IN

South Carolina

SC

Iowa

IA

South Dakota

SD

Kansas

KS

Tennessee

TN

Kentucky

KY

Texas

TX

Louisiana

LA

Utah

UT

Maine

ME

Vermont

VT

Maryland

MD

Virginia

VA

Massachusetts

MA

Washington

WA

Michigan

MI

Washington DC

DC

Minnesota

MN

West Virginia

WV



State

Code

State

Code


Mississippi

MS

Wisconsin

WI

Missouri MO


ISO Country Codes

Wyoming

WY

Country Name

Country Code

Country Name

Country Code


Afghanistan

af

Liechtenstein

li

Albania

al

Lithuania

lt


Algeria

dz

Luxembourg

lu

American Samoa

as

Macau

mo


Andorra

ad

Macedonia

mk

Angola

ao

Madagascar

mg


Anguilla

ai

Malawi

mw

Antarctica

aq

Malaysia

my


Antigua and Barbuda

ag

Maldives

mv

Argentina

ar

Mali

ml


Armenia

am

Malta

mt

Aruba

aw

Marshall Islands

mh


Australia

au

Martinique (French)

mq

Austria

at

Mauritania

mr


Azerbaidjan

az

Mauritius

mu

Bahamas

bs

Mayotte

yt


Bahrain

bh

Mexico

mx

Bangladesh

bd

Micronesia

fm


Barbados

bb

Moldavia

md

Belarus

by

Monaco

mc


Belgium

be

Mongolia

mn

Belize

bz

Montserrat

ms









741



Country Name

Country Code

Country Name

Country Code

Benin

bj

Morocco

ma

Bermuda

bm

Mozambique

mz

Bhutan

bt

Namibia

na

Bolivia

bo

Nauru

nr

Bosnia-Herzegovina

ba

Nepal

np

Botswana

bw

Netherlands

nl

Bouvet Island

bv

Netherlands Antilles

an

Brazil

br

New Caledonia (French)

nc

British Indian Ocean Territory

io

New Zealand

nz

Brunei Darussalam

bn

Nicaragua

ni

Bulgaria

bg

Niger

ne

Burkina Faso

bf

Nigeria

ng

Burundi

bi

Niue

nu

Cambodia

kh

Norfolk Island

nf

Cameroon

cm

North Korea

kp

Canada

ca

Northern Mariana Islands

mp

Cape Verde

cv

Norway

no

Cayman Islands

ky

Oman

om

Central African Republic

cf

Pakistan

pk

Chad

td

Palau

pw

Chile

cl

Panama

pa

China

cn

Papua New Guinea

pg

Christmas Island

cx

Paraguay

py

Cocos (Keeling) Islands

cc

Peru

pe

Colombia

co

Philippines

ph



Country Name

Country Code

Country Name

Country Code

Comoros

km

Pitcairn Island

pn

Congo

cg

Poland

pl

Cook Islands

ck

Polynesia (French)

pf

Costa Rica

cr

Portugal

pt

Croatia

hr

Puerto Rico

pr

Cuba

cu

Qatar

qa

Cyprus

cy

Reunion (French)

re

Czech Republic

cz

Romania

ro

Denmark

dk

Russian Nationaleration

ru

Djibouti

dj

Rwanda

rw

Dominica

dm

S. Georgia and S. Sandwich Isls.

gs

Dominican Republic

do

Saint Helena

sh

East Timor

tp

Saint Kitts and Nevis Anguilla

kn

Ecuador

ec

Saint Lucia

lc

Egypt

eg

Saint Pierre and Miquelon

pm

El Salvador

sv

Saint Tome (Sao Tome) and Principe

st

Equatorial Guinea

gq

Saint Vincent and Grenadines

vc

Eritrea

er

Samoa

ws

Estonia

ee

San Marino

sm

Ethiopia

et

Saudi Arabia

sa

Falkland Islands

fk

Senegal

sn

Faroe Islands

fo

Seychelles

sc

Fiji

fj

Sierra Leone

sl

Finland

fi

Singapore

sg



Country Name

Country Code

Country Name

Country Code

France

fr

Slovak Republic

sk

French Guyana

gf

Slovenia

si

Gabon

ga

Solomon Islands

sb

Gambia

gm

Somalia

so

Georgia

ge

South Africa

za

Germany

de

South Korea

kr

Germany

de

Spain

es

Ghana

gh

Sri Lanka

lk

Gibraltar

gi

Sudan

sd

Great Britain

gb

Suriname

sr

Greece

gr

Swaziland

sz

Greenland

gl

Sweden

se

Grenada

gd

Switzerland

ch

Guadeloupe (French)

gp

Syria

sy

Guam (USA)

gu

Tadjikistan

tj

Guatemala

gt

Taiwan

tw

Guinea

gn

Tanzania

tz

Guinea Bissau

gw

Thailand

th

Guyana

gy

Togo

tg

Haiti

ht

Tokelau

tk

Heard and McDonald Islands

hm

Tonga

to

Honduras

hn

Trinidad and Tobago

tt

Hong Kong

hk

Tunisia

tn

Hungary

hu

Turkey

tr

Iceland

is

Turkmenistan

tm



Country Name

Country Code

Country Name

Country Code

India

in

Turks and Caicos Islands

tc

Indonesia

id

Tuvalu

tv

Iran

ir

Uganda

ug

Iraq

iq

Ukraine

ua

Ireland

ie

United Arab Emirates

ae

Israel

il

United Kingdom

uk

Italy

it

United States of America

us

Ivory Coast (Cote D'Ivoire)

ci

Uruguay

uy

Jamaica

jm

Uzbekistan

uz

Japan

jp

Vanuatu

vu

Jordan

jo

Vatican City State

va

Kazakhstan

kz

Venezuela

ve

Kenya

ke

Vietnam

vn

Kiribati

ki

Virgin Islands (British)

vg

Kuwait

kw

Virgin Islands (USA)

vi

Kyrgyzstan

kg

Wallis and Futuna Islands

wf

Laos

la

Western Sahara

eh

Latvia

lv

Yemen

ye

Lebanon

lb

Yugoslavia

yu

Lesotho

ls

Zaire

zr

Liberia

lr

Zambia

zm

Libya

ly

Zimbabwe

zw


745


ISO Currency Codes

Currency Name

Currency Code

Country Name

Country Code

Afghanistan

AFN

Lebanon, Pounds

LBP

Albania, Leke

ALL

Lesotho, Maloti

LSL

Algeria, Algeria Dinars

DZD

Liberia, Dollars

LRD

Angola, Kwanza

AOA

Libya, Dinars

LYD

Argentina, Pesos

ARS

Lithuania, Litai

LTL

Armenia, Drams

AMD

Macau, Patacas

MOP

Aruba, Guilders (also called Florins)

AWG

Macedonia, Denars

MKD

Australia, Dollars

AUD

Madagascar, Ariary

MGA

Azerbaijan, New Manats

AZN

Malawi, Kwachas

MWK

Bahamas, Dollars

BSD

Malaysia, Ringgits

MYR

Bahrain, Dinars

BHD

Maldives (Maldive Islands), Rufiyaa

MVR

Bangladesh, Taka

BDT

Malta, Liri (expires 2008- Jan-31)

MTL

Barbados, Dollars

BBD

Mauritania, Ouguiyas

MRO

Belarus, Rubles

BYR

Mauritius, Rupees

MUR

Belize, Dollars

BZD

Mexico, Pesos

MXN

Bermuda, Dollars

BMD

Moldova, Lei

MDL

Bhutan, Ngultrum

BTN

Mongolia, Tugriks

MNT

Bolivia, Bolivianos

BOB

Morocco, Dirhams

MAD

Bosnia and Herzegovina, Convertible Marka

BAM

Mozambique, Meticais

MZN

Botswana, Pulas

BWP

Myanmar (Burma), Kyats

MMK

Brazil, Brazil Real

BRL

Namibia, Dollars

NAD

Brunei Darussalam, Dollars

BND

Nepal, Nepal Rupees

NPR

Bulgaria, Leva

BGN

Netherlands Antilles, Guilders (also called

ANG



Currency Name

Currency Code

Country Name

Country Code




Florins)


Burundi, Francs

BIF

New Zealand, Dollars

NZD


Cambodia, Riels

KHR

Nicaragua, Cordobas

NIO

Canada, Dollars

CAD

Nigeria, Nairas

NGN


Cape Verde, Escudos

CVE

Norway, Krone

NOK

Cayman Islands, Dollars

KYD

Oman, Rials

OMR


Chile, Pesos

CLP

Pakistan, Rupees

PKR

China, Yuan Renminbi

CNY

Palladium Ounces

XPD


Colombia, Pesos

COP

Panama, Balboa

PAB

Communauté Financière Africaine BCEAO, Francs

XOF

Papua New Guinea, Kina

PGK


Communauté Financière Africaine BEAC, Francs

XAF

Paraguay, Guarani

PYG

Comoros, Francs

KMF

Peru, Nuevos Soles

PEN


Comptoirs Français du Pacifique Francs

XPF

Philippines, Pesos

PHP

Congo/Kinshasa, Congolese Francs

CDF

Platinum, Ounces

XPT


Costa Rica, Colones

CRC

Poland, Zlotych

PLN

Croatia, Kuna

HRK

Qatar, Rials

QAR


Cuba, Pesos

CUP

Romania, New Lei

RON

Cyprus, Pounds (expires 2008-Jan-31)

CYP

Russia, Rubles

RUB


Czech Republic, Koruny

CZK

Rwanda, Rwanda Francs

RWF

Denmark, Kroner

DKK

Saint Helena, Pounds

SHP


Djibouti, Francs

DJF

Samoa, Tala

WST

Dominican Republic, Pesos

DOP

São Tome and Principe, Dobras

STD


East Caribbean Dollars

XCD

Saudi Arabia, Riyals

SAR

Egypt, Pounds

EGP

Seborga, Luigini

SPL









747



Currency Name

Currency Code

Country Name

Country Code

El Salvador, Colones

SVC

Serbia, Dinars

RSD

Eritrea, Nakfa

ERN

Seychelles, Rupees

SCR

Estonia, Krooni

EEK

Sierra Leone, Leones

SLL

Ethiopia, Birr

ETB

Silver, Ounces

XAG

Euro Member Countries, Euro

EUR

Singapore, Dollars

SGD

Falkland Islands (Malvinas), Pounds

FKP

Slovakia, Koruny

SKK

Fiji, Dollars

FJD

Solomon Islands, Dollars

SBD

Gambia, Dalasi

GMD

Somalia, Shillings

SOS

Georgia, Lari

GEL

South Africa, Rand

ZAR

Ghana, Cedis

GHS

Sri Lanka, Rupees

LKR

Gibraltar, Pounds

GIP

Sudan, Pounds

SDG

Gold, Ounces

XAU

Suriname, Dollars

SRD

Guatemala, Quetzales

GTQ

Swaziland, Emalangeni

SZL

Guernsey, Pounds

GGP

Sweden, Kronor

SEK

Guinea, Francs

GNF

Switzerland, Francs

CHF

Guyana, Dollars

GYD

Syria, Pounds

SYP

Haiti, Gourdes

HTG

Taiwan, New Dollars

TWD

Honduras, Lempiras

HNL

Tajikistan, Somoni

TJS

Hong Kong, Dollars

HKD

Tanzania, Shillings

TZS

Hungary, Forint

HUF

Thailand, Baht

THB

Iceland, Kronur

ISK

Tonga, Pa'anga

TOP

India, Rupees

INR

Trinidad and Tobago, Dollars

TTD

Indonesia, Rupiahs

IDR

Tunisia, Dinars

TND

International Monetary Fund (IMF) Spec Drwig Rghts

XDR

Turkey, New Lira

TRY



Currency Name

Currency Code

Country Name

Country Code

Iran, Rials

IRR

Turkmenistan, Manats

TMM

Iraq, Dinars

IQD

Tuvalu, Tuvalu Dollars

TVD

Isle of Man, Pounds

IMP

Uganda, Shillings

UGX

Israel, New Shekels

ILS

Ukraine, Hryvnia

UAH

Jamaica, Dollars

JMD

United Arab Emirates, Dirhams

AED

Japan, Yen

JPY

United Kingdom, Pounds

GBP

Jersey, Pounds

JEP

United States of America, Dollars

USD

Jordan, Dinars

JOD

Uruguay, Pesos

UYU

Kazakhstan, Tenge

KZT

Uzbekistan, Sums

UZS

Kenya, Shillings

KES

Vanuatu, Vatu

VUV

Korea (North), Won

KPW

Venezuela, Bolivares (expires 2008-Jun-30)

VEB

Korea (South), Won

KRW

Venezuela, Bolivares Fuertes

VEF

Kuwait, Dinars

KWD

Viet Nam, Dong

VND

Kyrgyzstan, Soms

KGS

Yemen, Rials

YER

Laos, Kips

LAK

Zambia, Kwacha

ZMK

Latvia, Lati

LVL

Zimbabwe, Zimbabwe Dollars

ZWD


Fiscal Period Codes

Code

Description

Code

Description

FY

Full Year

M9

Ninth Month Only

Q1

1st Quarter Only

M10

Tenth Month Only

Q2

2nd Quarter Only

M11

Eleventh Month Only

Q3

3rd Quarter Only

M12

Twelfth Month Only

Q4

4th Quarter Only

2M YTD

First Two Months

M1

First Month Only

4M YTD

First Four Months

M2

Second Month Only

5M YTD

First Five Months

M3

Third Month Only

7M YTD

First Seven Months

M4

Fourth Month Only

8M YTD

First Eight Months

M5

Fifth Month Only

10M YTD

First Ten Months

M6

Sixth Month Only

11M YTD

First Eleven Months

M7

Seventh Month Only

2Q YTD

First Two Quarters

M8

Eighth Month Only

3Q YTD

First Three Quarters


Default Payable Rollup Codes

Name

Rollup Code

Adjustments ADJ


Beginning Balance

BBAL

Cash EST


Provision

PRV

Inter-Year Reclass RCL


Default Payable Transaction Types

Name

Code

Rollup

Non-Payment Adjustments - Federal

NPADJ-F

ADJ

Non-Payment Adjustments

NPADJ

ADJ

Beginning Balance

BBAL

BBAL

1st Quarter Estimate - Federal

1ES-F

EST

1st Quarter Estimate

1ES

EST

2nd Quarter Estimate - Federal

2ES-F

EST

2nd Quarter Estimate

2ES

EST

3rd Quarter Estimate - Federal

3ES-F

EST

3rd Quarter Estimate

3ES

EST

4th Quarter Estimate - Federal

4ES-F

EST

4th Quarter Estimate

4ES

EST

Audit Refund

AREF

EST

Audit Settlement

ASET

EST

Federal Extension

1EXT-F

EST

Sub-Federal Extension

1EXT

EST

Income Return - Federal

INCR-F

EST

Income Return

INCR

EST



Name

Code

Rollup

Settlement - Federal

SET-F

EST

Refund

REF

EST

Settlement - Federal

SET-F

EST

Settlement

SET

EST

Settlement - CCI Other Federal

SET-CCI R

EST

Settlement - CEI Other Federal

SET-CEI R

EST

Unitary Allocations

UALLOC

EST

1st Quarter Provision - Federal

PQ1-F

EST

1st Quarter Provision

PQ1

PRV

2nd Quarter Provision - Federal

PQ2-F

PRV

2nd Quarter Provision

PQ2

PRV

3rd Quarter Provision - Federal

PQ3-F

PRV

3rd Quarter Provision

PQ3

PRV

4th Quarter Provision - Federal

PQ4-F

PRV

4th Quarter Provision

PQ4

PRV

6 Month Provision - Federal

PQ2YTD-F

PRV

6 Month Provision

PQ2YTD

PRV

9 Month Provision - Federal

PQ3YTD-F

PRV

9 Month Provision

PQ3YTD

PRV

Full Year Provision - Federal

PFY-F

PRV

Full Year Provision

PFY

PRV

Payable Auto Posting - Curr Prov

CPROV

PRV

Payable Auto Posting - Curr Prov Reclass

CPROV-REC

RCL

Payable Auto Posting - RTP

RTP

PRV

Payable Auto Posting - RTP Reclass

RTP-REC

RCL



Name

Code

Rollup

Payable Auto Posting - ATR

ATR

PRV

Payable Auto Posting - ATR Reclass

ATR-REC

RCL

Payable Auto Posting Noncash item

OTHER

PRV

Payable Auto Posting Noncash item Reclass

OTHER-REC

RCL

Provision Adjustments - Federal

PADJ-F

PRV

Provision Adjustments

PADJ

PRV

Return-To-Provision True-Up - Federal

PRTP-F

PRV

Return-To-Provision True-Up

PRTP

PRV

Intra-Year Reclass - Federal

ADJ-F

RCL

Intra-Year Reclass

ADJ

RCL


Permission Component Types

Description

Code

After Tax Temporary Differences

ATTD

Book Trial Balance

TBBB

Jurisdictions

J

Liability Transactions

LTXNS

NOLs Temporary Differences

NOLTD

Permanent Differences - List

CPD

State After Apportionment Temporary Differences

SAATD

State After Tax Temporary Differences

SATTD

State Permanent Differences

SPD

State Tax Adjustments

STADJ

Tax Adjustments - List

CTADJ

Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis

TD-A

Temporary Differences - List

CTD


Access Component Types

Description

Code

Access Rights Level


Reporting Dataset List

CDS

Sub Consolidation List

CSC

Unit List

CU

Preparer - Global Access

SO1

1st Reviewer - Global Access

SO2

2nd Reviewer - Global Access

SO3

Component Rollup Codes - Deferred

Line

Rollup Code

Line Description

Temporary Differences

TD

Temporary differences balances and activity.

NOL Temporary Differences

NOLTD

NOL temporary differences balances and activity.

After Tax Temporary Differences

ATTD

After tax temporary differences balances and activity.

State After Apportionment Temporary Differences

SAATD

State after apportionment temporary differences balances and activity.

State After Tax Temporary Differences

SATTD

State after tax temporary differences balances and activity.


Component Rollup Codes - Effective Rate

Line

Rollup Code

Line Description

Pre-Tax Book Income

PTBI

Pre-Tax Book Income from the Pre-Tax Book Income page.

State and Local Taxes

ST

Computed deductible for current state and local taxes.

Effect of Rates Different From Statutory

ERDS

Impact of statutory rates for units when their current tax rate differs from the group tax rate defined for the dataset.

Permanent Differences

PD

Permanent differences with type of P&L Adjustment.

Temporary Differences

TD

Temporary differences entered in the Deferred Provision Only column plus the impact of the change in deferred rates and the impact of the difference between current and deferred rates.

NOL

Temporary Differences

NOLTD

NOL Temporary differences entered in the Deferred Provision Only column plus the impact of the change in deferred rates and the impact of the difference between current and deferred rates.

Tax Adjustments

TADJ

Tax Adjustments.

After Tax Temporary Differences

ATTD

After tax temporary differences entered in the Deferred Provision Only column.

Deferred Provision Only Adjustment

DPOA

Deferred Provision Only Adjustment from the Unit Details page.



The lines on the Effective Tax Rate Report do not have rollup capabilities.

Component Rollup Codes - Trial Balance

Line

Rollup Code

Line Description

Trial Balance

TBBB

Trial balance sub lines


Query Filters

Shortcut

Description

References

<cc_dataset>

The dataset or group of datasets (as represented by the reporting dataset) currently selected.

Datasets.DataSetID

<cc_unit>

The unit currently selected.

Units.UnitID

<cc_subcon>

The group of units (as represented by the sub-consolidation) currently selected.

Units.UnitID

<cc_con>

The group of units (as represented by the consolidation), i.e., all units.

Units.UnitID

<cc_state>

The state currently selected.

States.StateID

<cc_currency>

The report type currently selected.

ReportTypes.ReportTypeID


System Parameters

You can activate the following System Parameters in the application for additional functionality. The Parameter Function column describes the functionality.

**Enter in Manage Restricted Features

Parameter Name

Parameter

Parameter Function

ALLOWMULTICURRENCYREPO

YES

YES allows sub-consolidated reports to display in

RT


Local Currency, when the Unit designated Currency



does not agree.

ALTCALC2_ADJ

YES

Define Where 2nd Scenario Calculation Posts

BRIDGE_ALLOW_ALL_UNITS

Y or N

Y by default (if there is no parameter), which allows



all users to bridge data into all units in the system



regardless of whether or not they have access rights



to the units. N removes the consolidation option for



the bridge.

BRIDGE_ALLOW_SUBCON_SEL

Y or N

Y by default (if there is no parameter), which allows

ECT


all users to bridge data into Sub Consolidations to



which they have access rights. N, no longer



displays the Sub Consolidation drop-down menu for



the bridge.

BRIDGE_ALLOW_UNIT_SELECT

Y or N

Y by default (if there is no parameter), which allows



all users to bridge data into Units to which they have



access rights. N no longer displays. The Unit drop-



down list for the bridge.

BRIDGE_DEFAULT_TAG

Tag Letter

Creates a default Tag Letter to be used when data is



brought in via the bridge.

BSOS_XXXX

Tag Letter_Tag

Activates the Balance Sheet Offset Summary


Letter

report. Balance Sheet Only amounts entered with



the tags established in the system parameter are



included. These amounts are rate effected and



display in the appropriate column based on the tag.

CC_DISABLE_STATES

0 or 1

1 removes pre-defined states from the Data Entry >



Jurisdiction drop-down list.

CLIENTDISPLAYNAME

Text

**Enter the name of the client to display on report



pages in the system, as well as in the header of



printed reports.

DefEndBalDefault

Tag letter and

Designates where the difference is posted when


type of event

Ending Balances are entered vs Activity for Book/



Tax Basis Temporary Differences.Examples:

  • O, A uses tag O and posts as Activity

  • X, D uses tag X and posts as Deferred Only

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN

1 through 26

Selects the column in the Deferred Balances Report



to display a sub-total balance for the Adjusted



Beginning Balance or any other purpose.



Parameter Name

Parameter

Parameter Function

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME

Text

Column Heading for the column created with DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN parameter.

DISABLE_DEFERREDPROVONL Y

1 or 2

1 displays the Deferred Provision Only entry field. However, no entry is permitted. 2 removes the Deferred Provision Only entry field.


Note: This parameter does not work for the State Details page.

DISABLE_RDS_CONSTRAINTS

0 or 1

1 removes the check when joining datasets in a sequential dataset.

EffectRatesDiffStat_PermNet

0 or 1

1 The Tax Effect of Rates Different than Statutory for permanent differences is included in the respective permanent difference line.

EFFRATEBRKOUT

0 or 1

1 enables the Unit Tax Rate view in Unit and Filing Group reports. It also enables on-page breakout, as well as the Use Blended Rate view in Sub- Consolidated and Consolidated reports.

ENABLE_APICPOOL

0 or 1

1 enables the APIC Pool functionality and report.

Enable_GS_Scrunch

0 or 1

1 enables you to select a Current GAAP, Current STAT, Non-Current GAAP, and Non-Current STAT class or tag for the scrunch functionality.

ENABLE_TSDEBUG

1

Information for the support team.

EXTENDED_USER_RESTRICTIO N

Activate in Manage Configuration

0 or 1

**1 enables assignments made for a user in the Admin area under System/Administer Users to restrict Import of data and Batch Print reports to only assigned datasets, units and sub- consolidations.

FILTER#_NAME

Text

Names the filtered Deferred Balances Report created with the FILTER#_SQL parameter.

FILTER#_SQL

SQL query

Filters deferred balances based on a SQL query to show a subset of deferred balances.

FISCAL_MONTHS_OFFSET 0-11 0 designates a calendar year for the payable auto

posting. For fiscal years, enter the fiscal month minus 12 (e.g., -1 = November; -2 = October, etc.).


Ending balances roll over to create beginning balances with the code BBAL and a date of fiscal year end plus 1 day. For example: If the paramvalue is -3, CPROV posts with a date of 9/30/CY and BBAL posts with a date of 10/1/CY.



Parameter Name

Parameter

Parameter Function

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE

_FX

0 or 1

1 displays the FX fields (Use Fx Rates During Calculations, Beg Fx Rate, and Wgt Avg Fx Rate) on the Flow-Through Factor page.

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUT OCALC

0 or 1

1 automatically calculates flow-through factors in reports.

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MAN UALCALC

0 or 1

1 displays the Calculate Flow-Through Factor Results menu item in the Provision and Estimated Payments datasets.

FORMAT_FOR_EXCEL

0 or 1

1 configures the Excel output to treat Leading Zeros or Scientific Notation as text, not numbers.

GLOBAL_XSL

0 or 1

**1 activates the Global Attachments 468 page in the Administration area. This page allow the JE style sheet to be uploaded.

GLOBAL_XSL_BROWSEUPDAT E

0 or 1

**1 displays the Browse and Update Attachment button on the Global Attachments 468 Page.

GLOBAL_XSL_SAVEAS

0 or 1

**1 displays the Attachment Save As button on the Global Attachments 468 page.

GlobalRegion

US or EUROPE or CANADA

**Select US, EUROPE, or CANADA to determine presentation of certain terminology in the user interface and reports.

gstags#

Tag Letter

Tag Letter isolates GAAP to STAT entries on the Tax Provision report. This parameter works in conjunction with the SHOW_GAAPTOSTAT.

JE_AUTOCREATE_OUTPUTJE

0 or 1

1 Configurable Journal Entry

itstagpermsgaap-yeprovgs-1

G:Manual

Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features.


itstagpermsstat-yeprovgs-1

S:Manual

Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features.

itstagtempsgaap-yeprovgs-1

G:Manual

Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features.

itstagtempsstat-yeprovgs-1

S:Manual

Define GAAP-to-Stat and Stat-to-Tax Tags for data entry pages by adding the following parameters in manage restricted features.

JE_AUTOREGEN_TAXCALCS

0 or 1

1 Configurable Journal Entry

JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_FEDE

Component ID

**Filters the Federal Component list for detail JE

RAL_XXX


configurations.

JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_STAT

Component ID

**Filters the State Component list for detail JE

E_XXX


configurations.

JE_COMPONENT_ROLLUP_SET

Alphanumeric

**The component rollup set code of the rollup group.

_CODE


Example: R99. (Use the Manage Rollups page to



create rollup sets and groups.) Rollup groups add



items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the



Journal Entries page.

JE_DATASET_DELETE_ALL

0 or 1

1 displays the Delete all Journal Entries menu



option in the Provision dataset under Data Review >



Dataset > Administration.

JE_FILTER#

Text

**A Temporary Difference Code. # can be any



number from 1-9. Filters add items to the Tax



Calculation drop-down list on the Journal Entries



page.

JE_FILTER_NAME#

Text

**The name of the filter group, such as Depreciation.



# can be any number from 1-9. Filters add items to



the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the Journal



Entries page.

JE_ROUNDING_DECIMAL_PLAC

Any integer from

Number of places to which calculated journal entries

ES

-6 to 6.

are rounded. The default value in the calculation



procedure is 2 (no rounding).

JE_SHOW_ZERO_BOOKCALCS

0 or 1

1 indicates that zero dollar Book calculations



display on Output Journal Entries reports.

JE_SHOW_ZERO_TAXCALCS

0 or 1

1 indicates that zero dollar Tax calculations display



on Output Journal Entries reports.

JE_STATE_GROUP_NAME_#

Text

The state group name. # can be any number from 1-



9. State groups add items to the Tax Calculation



drop-down list on the Journal Entries page.

JE_STATE_GROUP_%

Text

A state code. % can be any number from 1-9 and

_STATE##


## can be any number form 00 - 99. State groups



add items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on



the Journal Entries page.

JE_Supplemental_Label#

Text

The header text for Output Journal Entries reports.

JE_TAG_GROUP_#_NAME

Text

The tag group name. # can be any number from 1-9.



Tag groups add items to the Tax Calculation drop-



down list on the Journal Entries page.

JE_TAG_GROUP_#_TAGS

Text

A group of tags separated by commas. Example:



F, M, Q



# can be any number from 1-9. Tag groups add



items to the Tax Calculation drop-down list on the



Parameter Name

Parameter

Parameter Function



Journal Entries page.

JE_TYPE_LOCKED

0 or 1

1 prevents the JE Type field on the Journal Entries page from being editable after a journal entry configuration is saved.

JE_UNIT_DELETE_ALL

0 or 1

**1 activates the Delete All button on the Journal Entries page.

LIMIT_PAYABLE_DATES

Y or N

Y allows only dates within the dataset to be used when making entries in the payable. N lifts the restriction and allows any date to be entered.

LockoutMinutes

Numeral

Number of minutes a user should be locked out of the system once they have exceeded the specified number of login attempts.

MaxFailLogins

Numeral

Number of login attempts before a user is locked out of the system.

PassHistNum

Numeral

Number of unique passwords that must be used before a user's password can be repeated.

POST_AMORTIZED

0, 1 or 2

  1. posts Deferred Only adjustments to Book/Tax Basis. lines.

  2. adjustments with deferred only amounts will post the RTP to the respective Tax Basis and Book/Tax Basis lines.

    • Adjustments (Deferred Only amounts) posted to

      Temp Diff – Book/Tax Basis posts the RTP to Temp Diff – Book/Tax Basis.

    • Adjustments (Deferred Only amounts) posted to

      Temp Diff – Tax Basis posts the RTP to Temp Diff –Tax Basis.

    • Adjustments (Deferred Only amounts) posted to

      AT Temp Diff – Book/Tax Basis posts the RTP to AT Temp Diff – Book/Tax Basis.

    • Adjustments (Deferred Only amounts) posted to

AT Temp Diff – Tax Basis posts the RTP to AT Temp Diff – Tax Basis.

POST_DO

0 or 1

1 enables the calculation of Deferred Only Return to Provision (RTP) true-ups.

POST_BSO

0 or 1

1 enables the calculation of Balance Sheet Only Return to Provision (RTP) true-ups. Your adjustments with balance sheet only amounts will post the RTP to the respective Tax Basis and Book/ Tax Basis lines.

POST_GAAP


1 enables the GAAP to STAT RTP posting

POST_STATE 0 or 1 1 enables the calculation of State Return to



Provision (RTP) true-ups.

PRINTFORMAT_PAGESWIDE

Numeral

Number of pages reports should print to override the



default of shrink to fit 1 page.

PROVISION_HIDE_STATES

0 or 1

1 adjusts the Stored Procedure Tax Provision report,



so that the detailed view does not display state-by-



state detail.

PROVSCBRKOUT

0 or 1

1 displays the CSC Tax Provision Report under sub-



consolidation.

REPORT_FOOTER

Text

Text entered displays as a page footer on reports



when printed.

REPORT_HEADER

Text

Text entered displays as a page header on reports



when printed.

ReportingCurrencySymbol

Text

By adding this parameter, you can change the



default three-letter reporting currency symbol (USD)



that appears in the header of reports when viewed in



Reporting Currency.

SEPARATESTATE#

State Code

Enter the State code to configure how the State Tax



Prov Rpt Breakout displays works with the



STATE_BREAKOUT_UNIT parameter. Activate in



Manage Configuration

SHOW_ADVANCEDLIABILITY

0 or 1

1 allows Payable functionality and allows it to work



properly. SHOW_SIMPLELIABILITY and



SHOW_LIABILITY should be 0. SHOW_LIABILITY

SHOW_ALTPROVCALC

0 or 1

1 Alternative Provision Calculations

SHOW_ALTPROVCALC

0 or 1

1 Define Where 1st Scenario Calculation Posts

SHOW_BRIDGEUNITMAP

0 or 1

**1 activates the Unit Mapping page in the Manage



Bridge section.

SHOW_CASHPYMTS

0 or 1

**1 activates the Cash Payments report, which



displays the Return Basis Provision (formerly known



as the Cash Provision) and subtracts the payments.

SHOW_CTA

0 or 1

1 enables you to manually enter Currency



Translation Adjustment (CTA) calculations for all



temporary differences via the Additional CTA option.



The entry is in the Reporting Currency and After Tax



Rate format. Depending on which fields are



populated, amounts could impact both Current and



Deferred Tax Expense, Deferred Only Tax Expense,



or Equity. Amounts are tracked and shown on



reports with a system-defined After Tax Temporary



Difference.



Parameter Name

Parameter

Parameter Function

SHOW_DEFBALCSCBRKOUT

0 or 1

1 displays the CSC Deferred Balances Report under sub-consolidation.

SHOW_EFFRATECONSOLPTBIP CT

0 or 1

1 displays an additional line in the effective tax rates that further analyzes the components in the CSC ETR Report under sub-consolidation.

SHOW_EFFRATECSCBRKOUT

0 or 1

1 displays the CSC Effective Tax Rate Report under sub-consolidation.

SHOW_EXPECTEDDEFERRED

0 or 1

1 displays the Expected Deferred Report.

SHOW_GAAPTOSTAT

0 or 1

1 allows GAAP to STAT functionality. This parameter works in conjunction with the GAAPTOSTAT and gstags parameters.

SHOW_JE

0 or 1

1 allows the Journal Entry functionality.

SHOW_LIABILITY

0 or 1

1 enables the Liability tab, if using. SHOW_ADVANCEDLIABILITY should be set to 0.

SHOW_OUTPUTJE

0 or 1

1 activates the configurable journal entry.

SHOW_PAYABLERECLASS

0 or 1

1 activates the reclass functionality to allow unit-to- unit reclass of the payable liability.

SHOW_PLUGINDEV

0 or 1

***1 to display the plug-in report settings page.

SHOW_SIMPLELIABILITY

0 or 1

1 enables Simple Liability if using. SHOW_ADVACEDLIABILITY should be set to 0.

SHOW_WORKPAPER

0 or 1

1 displays the Workpaper Report.

STATE_BREAKOUT_UNIT

Unit Code

1 Enter the Unit code to configure how the State Tax Prov Rpt Breakout display works with the SEPARATESTATE# parameter.

TBIS_ADJ

0 or 1

1 Define where BBC Calculation Posts

TSPasswordExpireDays

Numeral

1 The number determines how many days a password can be active.

TSPasswordMinDigits

Numeral

The number determines the minimum number of digits that must be in a user's password.

TSPasswordMinLength

Numeral

The number determines the minimum amount of keystrokes that must be in a user's password.

0 or 1 **0 uses the Reporting Currency Alternative

USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR_Def Minimum Tax (AMT) calculation method for any

ault new dataset that is created. 1 creates new datasets with the Local Currency AMT methodology.

USE_SPDEFBALREPORTS

0 or 1

1 allows additional view options on the Deferred Balances report and the expanded views display on page vs. exporting to Excel.

USE_SPPROVISIONREPORTS

0 or 1

1 allows additional view options on the Tax Provision report and the expanded views display on page vs. exporting to Excel.

USE_SPPROVSUMMARYREPO RTS

0 or 1

1 allows additional view options on the State Provision Summary report. The expanded views display on page vs. exporting to Excel.

UserExtended

0 or 1

1 adds more information fields about a user (email, phone, number, etc.) in the Administer User section under the Administration area under System.

CASE_INSENSITIVE_LOGIN

0 or 1

** 0 specifies that all user logins are case-sensitive.

1 specifies that all user logins are not case-



sensitive

SHOW_CASHPYMTS

0 or 1

**1 activates the Cash Payments report, which displays the Return Basis Provision (formerly known as the Cash Provision) and subtracts the payments.

SHOW_DATABASEANALYZER

0 or 1

**1 activates the TS Database Analyzer, which allows Administrators to run SQL queries on database data.

SHOW_DATABASEANALYZER

0 or 1

**1 activates the TS Database Analyzer, which allows Administrators to run SQL queries on database data.


Dataset Parameters

You can activate the following "Dataset Parameters" in the application for additional functionality. The "Parameter Function" column describes the functionality.

Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function

AdvLiabPosting

Alphanumeri c

N

Deactivates the auto payable posting

AdvLiabPosting

Alphanumeri c

Y

Activates the auto payable posting.

AWP_WRITE

Alphanumeri c

0 or 1

1 makes Active Workpapers read/ write for Read/Write users.

BSORTPTAG

Alphanumeri c

Tag letter

Configures the tag that designates RTP Deferred Only adjustments. Overrides the default Balance Sheet Only posting tag.


CASENUMBER Alphanumeri c

User Defined Code

Case number that identifies the unit when exporting data to compliance



Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function




systems.

CTA_ALT_CALC

Alphanumeri c

1

Enables automatic calculation of Currency Translation Adjustment (CTA) for all temporary differences via the Alternative calculation (through P/L). This calculation computes the current Tax Expense, which is offset in a Taxes Payable account. The Deferred Tax Expense is offset in the Ending Deferred Tax Asset/Liability accounts.

CUSTOM_HEADERS

Alphanumeri c

1

  • You can add information to the header of each "component" page.

DEFAULT_TD_TAB

Alphanumeri c

0, 1, or 2

  • 0 displays the Detail section of Temporary Difference pages for all users.


  • 1 displays the Analysis section of Temporary Difference pages for Read/Write and Read-Only users, and the Detail section for Administrators.


  • 2 displays the Analysis section of Temporary Difference pages for all users.

DefEndBalDefault

Alphanumeri c

Tag letter and type of event

Designates at the dataset level where the difference is posted when Ending Balances are entered vs Activity for Book/Tax Basis Temporary Differences.


Examples:

  • O,A uses tag O and posts as Activity

  • X,D uses tag X and posts as Deferred Only


Note: This parameter overrides the DefEndBalDefault system parameter.

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN

Alphanumeri c

1 thru 26

Selects the column in the Deferred Balances Report to display a sub- total balance for the Adjusted Beginning Balance or any other purpose for a specific dataset.


Note: This parameter overrides the



Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function




DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN

system parameter.

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME

Alphanumeri c

Text

Column Heading for the column created with DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN

parameter.


Note: This parameter overrides the DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME

system parameter.

DORTPTAG

Alphanumeri c

Tag letter

Configures the tag that designates RTP Deferred Only adjustments. Overrides the default Deferred Only posting tag.

EstPymtFranchiseType

Alphanumeri c

Tag Letter

Dictates the tag letter used in the payment

summary report for income payments.

EstPymtPctCushion

Decimal Number

1.XX

Cushion amount that should be added to Estimated Tax Payments.

EstPymtRoundFactor

Whole Number

X00, X000

Rounding factors applied to Estimated Tax Payments.

EstPymtType

Alphanumeri c

Tag Letter

Dictates the tag letter used in the payment

summary report for income

payments.

FATTD_Prefix

Alphanumeri c

AT Temp Diff Code

Identifies which of the After Tax Temporary Differences (ATTD) should be considered as Foreign Tax Credit Carryover amounts for the Alternative Minimum Tax Calculation. If no value is entered, no ATTD is included in the calculation.

FEDBENEFITOFSTATE

Alphanumeri c

FED/STATE

"FED" Federal Benefit of State impact in the Federal Rate or "State" Federal Benefit of State impact in the State Rate.

*Mass Update Rates:




CountryRates

Alphanumeri c

Y

Y will show a table that stores rates that will automatically update country rates for a dataset.


CurrencyRates Alphanumeri c

Y Y will show a table that stores rates that will automatically update



Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function




currency rates for a dataset.

StateRates

Alphanumeri c

Y

Y will show a table that stores rates that will automatically update state rates for a dataset.





NOLAUTO_BSO_EXCLUSIONYY Y

Alphanumeri c

Tag letter

Used to exclude Balance Sheet Only amounts from the Federal NOLs Automation balance. (YYY are numbers and Tag Letter is the tag that should be excluded.) Multiple tags can be excluded by setting up multiple parameters.

NOLAUTO_DEFONLY_EXCLUSI ONXXX

Alphanumeri c

Tag letter

Used to exclude Deferred Only amounts from the Federal NOLAutomation balance. (XXX are numbers and Tag Letter is the tag that should be excluded.) Multiple tags can be excluded by setting up multiple parameters.

PAYABLE_CPROV_DOM_BUCK ET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's Federal Current Return Basis Tax Charge posts to.

PAYABLE_CPROV_FOR_BUCK ET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's Federal National Return Basis Tax Charge posts to.

PAYABLE_CPROV_DOM_STAT E_BUCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's State Current Return Basis Tax Charge posts to.

PAYABLE_CPROV_FOR_STATE

_BUCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's Current State Return Basis Tax Charge posts to.

PAYABLE_FXRATE_CALC

Alphanumeri c

1

1 allows you to specify for a particular dataset not to default to the filing unit's FX rate, but to calculate by summing all Cash Federal Provisions in Local Currency and dividing by all Cash Federal Provisions in Reporting Currency when payable items are being calculated for a filing group.


PAYABLE_RTP_DOM_BUCKET Alphanumeri

c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's Federal Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to.



Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function

PAYABLE_RTP_FOR_BUCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's Federal Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to.

PAYABLE_RTP_DOM_STATE_B UCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Domestic Unit's State Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to.

PAYABLE_RTP_FOR_STATE_B UCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Determines which payable bucket the Foreign Unit's State Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to.

PAYRECTYPE

Alphanumeri c

0, 1 or 2

Determines how the PAYRECUNIT parameter functions:


  • 0 indicates there is no payable reclass.


  • 1 indicates that the Payable Reclass on the Federal and State levels is based on the unit determined for PAYRECUNIT at the Unit Dataset parameter level.


  • 2 indicates that the Payable Reclass on the Federal level is based on the unit determined for PAYRECUNIT at the Unit Dataset parameter level. In addition, the Payable Reclass on the State level is based on the unit determined for PAYRECUNIT at the Unit State Dataset parameter level.

Prior_Year_Tag#

Alphanumeri c

Tag Letter

Determines which NC_ and Deferred amounts are considered in the Prior Year Breakout view of the Foreign/ Domestic Summary report, based on their tag letters.


For example: To include NC_ and Deferred amounts tagged with R and X, add the dataset parameters:

  • Prior_Year_Tag1, Alphanumeric,

    R

  • Prior_Year_Tag2, Alphanumeric, X


PULL_PAY_FROM_DATASET Alphanumeri

c

Dataset Name Entering the name of the Provision

Dataset in the Estimated Tax Payments dataset posts payable



Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function




transaction codes 1ES, 1ES-F, 2ES, 2ES-F, 3ES, 3ES-F, 4ES,

4ESF,ADJ and ADJ-F total display on the Federal Est Pymt and State Est Pymt reports after Reset Report Data.

RestrictTA

Alphanumeri c

Beginning of code which should not be modifiable

Restricts Read/Write users on data entry/modification of tax adjustment codes.

RestrictTag_X

Alphanumeri c

Beginning of tag which should not be modifiable

  • Restricts Read/Write users on data entry/modification of tags. X represents the specified tag with a paramvalue of the specified tag.

RESTRICT_TD_TABS

Alphanumeri c

0 or 1

  • 0 allows Administrators and Read/ Write users to enter data either on both the Analysis and Detail sections of Temporary Difference pages.


  • 1 limits the ability to enter data in the Details section of Temporary Difference pages to Administrators only. All users, however, can view data in the Details section.

RTPTAG

Alphanumeri c

Tag letter

Configures the tag that designates RTP Deferred Only adjustments. Overrides the default RTP posting tag.

RTPSUBCLASS

Alphanumeri c

Y

Activate this dataset parameter when you want to post multiple years of GAAP and STAT Return-to-Provision true-up adjustments for Class datasets. When activated in the return dataset, this parameter will append the year to the system generated RTP Class and Subclass appropriately identifying the year and the GAAP or STAT designation.


SCRUNCH_TAG Alphanumeri c

Any letter from A through Z.

Enables similarly-coded and similarly-designated (Current/Non- Current) temporary differences (with the same or different tag letters) to be aggregated when rolling over datasets using the Scrunch functionality.



Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function

USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR

Alphanumeri c

0 or 1

0 uses the Reporting Currency approach for the Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT) calculation for the dataset, overriding the system parameter.

USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR_Default

764 . 1 uses the Local Currency methodology.

USETBPTBI

Alphanumeri c

0

Deactivates the PTBI bridge posting

USETBPTBI

Alphanumeri c

1

Activates the PTBI bridge posting for all income statement accounts

USETBPTBI

Alphanumeri c

2

  • Activates the PTBI bridge posting for all accounts with codes beginning with PTBI

VA_CALCTYPE

Alphanumeri c

0, 2, 3 or 4

  • 2 activates the aggregated Valuation Allowance automation.

  • 3 activates the aggregated Valuation Allowance automation.

  • 4 activates the aggregated post- tax Valuation Allowance automation.

  • 0 activates the separate Valuation

Allowance automation.


Unit Dataset Parameters

The following Unit Dataset Parameters relate to the JE and Payable functionality.


Parameter

Paramete r

Parameter Value

Parameter Function

JE_CALCULATE_ENTRIES

Alphanumeri c

0 or 1

Y indicates that journal entries are calculated for a unit.

PAYABLE_CPROV_BUCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Define which payable bucket the Current Cash Provision posts to.

PAYRECUNIT

Alphanumeri c

Parent Unit Code

Available in versions 6.0.0 and higher. Reclasses the unit's payable information to a parent unit. Enter the code for the unit in which the payable information should be included as the key value.

  • When the PAYRECTYPE 769

    dataset parameter is activated with a paramvalue of 1, the system reclasses both Federal and State auto-posted payables to the unit identified by the unit level parameter PAYRECUNIT.

  • When the PAYRECTYPE 769

dataset parameter is activated with a paramvalue of 2, the system reclasses Federal auto- posted payables to the unit identified by the unit level parameter PAYRECUNIT.


Note: The paramvalue of 2 is available in versions 6.1.0 and higher.

PAYABLE_RTP_BUCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Define which payable bucket the Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to.


Unit State Dataset Parameters

The following Unit State Dataset Parameters relate to the Payable functionality.

Parameter

Paramete r Type

Parameter Value

Parameter Function

PAYABLE_CPROV_BUC KET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Define which payable bucket the Current Cash Provision posts to.

PAYABLE_RTP_BUCKET

Alphanumeri c

Payable Bucket Code

Define which payable bucket the Tax Adj with codes NC_RTP or NC_ATR posts to.

PAYRECUNIT

Alphanumeri c

Unit

Available in versions 6.1.0 and higher. Reclasses the unit's payable information to a parent unit on the state level. Enter the code for the unit in which the payable information should be included as the key value.


Note: This parameter is only valid when the PAYRECTYPE 769 dataset parameter is activated with a paramvalue of 2.


Special Characters

The following list of special characters are supported by the application. These characters will appear on reports.


Import Error Messages

Import Categories

Example:


import NOL temporary differences

incomplete/badly formatted data, sheet #CNOLTD# NOL TempDiffs, line 3

“incomplete/badly formatted data” – Necessary information is missing.


Go back to the page indicated and check that you have entered all the necessary information.

Import Numbers

Example:


import state tax adjustments

D1000/NY/STA1000: badly formatted data

“Badly formatted data” – Not enough information for that unit/perm diff/temp diff, etc. Means the same thing as “Incomplete record.” Found in #UTA# Unit Tax Adjustments, #UTBBS# Unit Trail BalSheet.


Verify that you have entered information into all the mandatory fields.

Example:


import temporary differences

D1000/T1000/: incomplete record

“Incomplete record” – Not enough information for that unit/perm diff/temp diff, etc. Means the same thing as “Badly formatted data.”


Verify that you have entered information into all the mandatory fields.

Example:


import NOL temporary differences

D1000/NOL1000/D: key references non-existing categories

“Key references non-existing categories” – When you have referenced a unit, temp diff, or perm diff that has not yet been created in import_categories.


Go back to import_categories and create that unit, temp diff, or perm diff in the appropriate page (e.g., #CU# Units to create a unit). Then go to import_numbers and input the information for that unit, temp diff, or perm diff in the appropriate page (e.g., #U# Unit for a unit, #UPD# Unit Perm Diffs for a permanent difference, etc.).

If you’ve already created the unit, temp, perm diff, etc., and the error message is still coming up, make sure that you have not entered a space before any of the codes. For example, “ D1000” should be “D1000”.

Example:


import NOL temporary differences

D2000/NOL1000/D: no parent record

“No parent record” – When you have referenced a unit, temp diff, or perm diff that exists (i.e., has been created in import_categories), but for which no record has been created in import_numbers.


Go to import_numbers and input the information for that unit in the appropriate page (e.g., #U# Unit to create a unit record, #UPD# Unit Temp Diffs for a temporary difference, etc.


Where to Enter Items in Onesource Tax Provision



Entry Column:

Current Tax Provision

Deferred Tax Provision

Ending Deferred Balance

Effective Tax Rate

Activity





Deferred Only





Balance Sheet Only





Index


- A -

Access Rights Levels 755 Accounts

Deferred Tax 32

Ending Deferred Tax Asset 648 Ending Payable 648

Equity 648

Liability 648

Taxes Payable 648, 714

Activity 59, 75

Actual 660

Actual Apportionment 671

Actual Pre-Tax Book Income 660, 667 Add

After Tax Temporary Difference 427

Bridge Mappings 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448,

449

Dataset Parameters 57

Intercompany Transaction

429

NOL Temporary Difference

426

Payable Buckets 451


Payable Rollups 450


Payable Transaction Types

450

Permanent Difference 423


State 436


State After Apportionment Temporary Difference 438

State After Tax Temporary Difference 437 State Tax Adjustment 439

Sub-Consolidation 419

System Parameter 534

Tax Adjustment 428

Temporary Difference 424 Trial Balance Line 430 Trial Balance SubLine 431 Unit 417

Additional CTA 648, 649, 658, 659, 659

Additional Paid in Capital 711 ADJ (Adjustment) 450

Adjustments 696

Balance Sheet Only 723 Book 713

BSO 723


Deferred Only 716, 723

Equity 174, 214

Federal Non-Cash Tax 723 Non-Cash Tax 716

P&L 174, 214

Return to Provision 399 RTP Deferred Only 725 State Non-Cash 723 State Non-Cash Tax 723 Tax 716

Tax Re-class 713

Temporary Difference 723

Administration 20, 21

Administrators 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, 35, 38, 38, 57, 89, 93,

167, 171, 184, 201, 217, 220, 351, 376, 534, 556, 562, 592,

648, 671, 689, 701, 708, 710

Advance to Next Quarter 51

After Tax Temporary Differences 32 Add 427

Delete 427

Import 427

After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis Import 155

After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Import 151

After-Tax Temporary Difference CTA_SYS 658, 659

Aggregated Attribute Basis 726 Alternative CTA 648, 649, 654

Alternative Minimum Tax 114, 348, 605

Calculation 606

Local Currency approach 604 Local Currency Method 606 Reporting Currency approach 604

Alternative Minimum Tax Estimator Calculation 605

Reporting Currency approach 605 Aministrators 20

Amortized Compensation 159

Amortized Permanent Differences 446, 726

Import 177

AMT 114, 348, 604, 605, 606

AMT Liability/Recapture 605

APIC Pool 159, 711, 712

APIC Pool Amounts 159 APIC Pool Parameters

ENABLE_APICPOOL 304, 712

Apportionment


Apportionment Actual 671

Forecast State 671

Audit Trail 35, 542, 730

Automation 27

AMT 114, 348

NOL 114

Valuation Allowance 114, 603


- B -

Balance Sheet 644

Balance Sheet Only 59, 75, 723

BBAL (Beginning Balance) 450, 450

Beginning Balances 398

Book Balance Sheet 434, 713 Book Income Statement 434 Book Months 398

Book Tax Adjustment 434 Book Trial Balance 712

Book-Tax Difference

726

Bridge 713


Bridge Extract File

4 Column Format


566

6 Column Format

566

Comma Separated File Format 566 Tab Delimited File Format 566

Bridge Import 562

Bridge File Formats 566 Process 565

Bridge Map Template 592 Bridge Mapping 562, 592, 602

Bridge mappings 440, 443, 444, 446, 447, 713

Add 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449

Delete 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449

Import 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449

Bridge Parameters SHOW_BRIDGEUNITMAP 449

Bridged Activity 399

Bridged data 27

BSO 723

Bulk Copy Paste (BCP) 565


- C -

Calculations 34

Alternative Minimum Tax 348

Quarterly Estimated Payments 332, 346 State Forecast Rate 315

State Tax Provision 318, 321, 328, 330

Categories 35, 376

Export Payable Categories 451 Categories Audit Trail 545 Category items 20

Child 27

Child unit 707

Code 94

NOL_SYS 114, 167

VA_SYS 114

Codes 20, 93

Access Rights Levels 755 AMT_SYS 604, 605, 606

Component Rollup 755, 756, 756

Country 56, 741

Currency 746

Date Range 750

ISO Country 417, 469

ISO Currency 417, 469

NOL Temporary Difference 21 Non-Cash Tax Adjustments 21 Permission Component Types 754 Reclass Rollup 705

Rollup 284, 286, 751

Rollup Bucket 536

State 81

Tax Adjustment 714

Valuation Allowance Automation 21 Combination of Datasets 23

Combine Datasets 379, 392

Compliance System 731

Component Code 731 Component Rollup Codes

Deferred 755

Effective Tax Rate 756 Trial Balance 756

Components

Book to Tax Adjustments 23 Payable Items 23

System Items 23

Unit Attributes 23

Concepts 16

Configurable JE 339

Configurations 376

Consolidated Sub-consolidations 708

Contra Asset 726, 727, 728, 728


Control Center 36, 37

Countries 93 Country Codes

Import 469

Create

Reporting Dataset 404

Rollups 536

CTA 643, 648, 649, 699

CTA Parameters

CTA_ALT_CALC 649, 654, 655, 657

SHOW_CTA 649, 658

Cumulative Temporary Differences 713 Currencies 93

Currency 37, 643, 644, 644, 699

Foreign 603

Functional 643

Local 230, 348, 349, 441, 604, 605, 606, 648, 730

Local Currency 108, 643

Reporting 230, 348, 350, 441, 604, 605, 606, 730

Reporting Currency 108, 643 Currency Codes

Import 469

Currency Translation Adjustment 648 Local 37, 643, 644, 699

Local Currency 644

Reporting 37, 643, 699

Reporting Currency 644

Current 32, 398, 444, 445, 447

Current federal loss 607 Current Provision 719, 722, 723

Custom JE 339

Custom Sub-consolidations 708


- D -

Data Collection tool 33, 730 Data Entry Policy 181

Data Export 660

Data Import 660

Data Review 145

Dataset 394, 398, 731

Forecast 51

Rollover 384, 398 Dataset Parameter

CTA_ALT_CALC 649, 654, 655, 657

RTPTAG 726

USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR 605, 606

Dataset Parameters 604, 701

Add 57

AdvLiabPosting 765

BSORTPTAG 765

CASENUMBER 765

CountryRates 56

CTA_ALT_CALC 765

CurrencyRates 55

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN 765

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME 765

DEFAULT_TD_TAB 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204, 209,

224, 765

DefEndBalDefault 765

Delete 57

DORTPTAG 723, 725, 765

EstPymtFranchiseType 765

EstPymtPctCushion 765

EstPymtRoundFactor 765

EstPymtType 765

FATTD_Prefix 765

FEDBENEFITOFSTATE 307, 308, 308, 765

HOLDSDORTP_YYYY 725

HOLDSRTP_YYYY 725

Import 57

NOLAUTO_BSO_EXCLUSIONYYY 765

NOLAUTO_DEFONLY_EXCLUSIONXXX 765

PAYABLE_CPROV_DOM_BUCKET 765

PAYABLE_CPROV_DOM_STATE_BUCKET 765

PAYABLE_CPROV_FOR_BUCKET 765

PAYABLE_CPROV_FOR_STATE_BUCKET 765

PAYABLE_FXRATE_CALC 765

PAYABLE_RTP_DOM_BUCKET 765

PAYABLE_RTP_DOM_STATE_BUCKET 765

PAYABLE_RTP_FOR_BUCKET 765

PAYABLE_RTP_FOR_STATE_BUCKET 765

Prior_Year_Tag# 765

PULL_PAY_FROM_DATASET 765

RESTRICT_TD_TABS 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204,

209, 224, 765

RestrictTA 93, 94, 94, 765

RestrictTag_X 93, 94, 94, 765

RTPTAG 723, 723, 725, 765

SCRUNCH_TAG 765

StateRates 81

USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR 765

USETBPTBI 765

VA_CALCTYPE 728, 728, 765

Dataset Relations 716, 722

RTP Target 394

Tax Return 394


Datasets 30, 36, 57, 91, 376

Blank 22

Combine 379, 392

Combined 22

Compliance 332, 346

Current Provision 719

Deletion 379

Import 379

Interim 378, 660, 660, 663, 669

Multiple 22

Provision 332, 346, 669, 719, 722, 731

Reporting 22, 23, 378, 404, 592, 715

Reporting - Additive 23, 404, 592

Reporting - Sequential 23, 404, 408, 592

Return 716, 717, 719, 722

RTP Provision 716

RTP Target 716, 726

Target 719, 722

Tax Return 716

True-up 715 Datsets

Interim 341, 406

Deactivate a unit 31 Deferred Only 59, 75

Deferred Provision 723

Deferred Rollforwards 59, 470 Deferred Rollforwards Columns 470 Deferred Tax Asset 159

Deferred Tax Assets 726 Deferred Tax Provision 651, 652 Delete

After Tax Temporary Difference 427

Bridge Mappings 441, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448,

449

Dataset 379

Dataset Parameters 57

Intercompany Transaction

429

NOL Temporary Difference

426

Payable Buckets 451


Payable Rollups 450


Payable Transaction Types

450

Permanent Difference 423


State 436


State After Apportionment Temporary Difference 438

State After Tax Temporary Difference 437 State Tax Adjustment 439

Sub-Consolidation 419

System Parameter 534

Tax Adjustment 428

Temporary Difference 424 Trial Balance Line 430 Trial Balance SubLine 431 Unit 417


- E -

Effective Tax Rate 108, 731

Ending Balances 398

Ending Deferred Tax Asset account 648 Ending Payable account 648

Equity account 648

Equity Adjustment 443, 446

Error Messages 775

EST (Cash) 450

Estimated Payments 89, 117

Excel 398

Export Mappings 435, 602 Exporting to Return 603 Extension payments 18

Extraordinary/Discrete items 667


- F -

FAS 123R 711

FBOS 307

FBOS Parameters

FEDBENEFITOFSTATE 307, 308, 308

Federal Benefit of State 307, 308

Federal Provision 25 Federal Taxable Income 614

Federal Taxable Income (Post-NOL) 610, 611, 612,

613, 615, 616, 617, 618, 619, 619

Federal Taxable Income (Pre-NOL) 610, 611, 612, 613,

615, 616, 617, 618, 619

Federal/National Reports AMT Estimator 251

Attachments Review 251

Deferred Balances 251

Deferred Workpaper 251 Effective Tax Rate 251

Effective Tax Rate – CSC Breakout 251 Expected Deferred Rate 251

Federal Est Pymt 251 Forecast True Up 251 Forecasted Rate Report 251

Foreign/Domestic Summary 251


Federal/National Reports Journal Entry Reports 251

Net Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities 251 NOL Balances 251

NOLs Expiration 251

Payable Detail 251

Payable Rollforward 251

Tax Basis Balance Sheet 251 Tax Provision 251

Tax Provision - Interim 251 Temporary Difference Summary 251

Temporary Difference Summary (Fed Filing Group) 251

Trial Balance Reports 251 Unit Summary 251

User Status 251 File Formats

Bridge 566

Files 30

Filing Group 27, 284, 286, 606, 727, 728, 728

Filing Groups 24

Filing unit 114

Forecast 660

Forecast Dataset 51

Forecast reporting 603

Forecast State Apportionment 671 Foreign Currency issues 603 Foreign Exchange Rates 37


- G -

Gaap to STAT Parameters GAAPTOSTAT# 264

gstags# 264

SHOW_GAAPTOSTAT 264

General Ledger 201, 562, 713

General Ledger Extract 565, 566

Global Access 33, 729, 730


Screens 473

Administer Permissions 457

Administer Users 457

After Tax Temporary Differences 417, 427

After Tax Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 155

After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 151 Amortized Permanent Differences 177, 440, 446 APIC Pool Amounts 159


Screens 473

Attachments and Comments 30 Country Rates 56

Currency Rates 55

Datasets 378, 379, 394, 404

Estimated Payments 117

Global Attachments 457, 468 Intercompany Transaction Entry 164

Intercompany Transactions

429

InterCompanyTransactions

417

Interim Datasets 378


Interim Unit Details 161


Journal Entries 690


Journal Entry Summary 457, 540

Login History 457, 468

Manage Countries and Currencies 91 Manage Countries/Currencies 457, 643

Manage Datasets 280

Manage Deferred Rollforwards 38, 59, 457, 470 Manage Interim Datasets 406

Manage Licenses 457, 480

Manage NOL Rollforwards 38, 75, 457, 473

Manage Payable Buckets 450, 451

Manage Payable Rollups 450, 450 Manage Payable Transaction Types 450 Manage Payable Txn Types 450 Manage Reporting Datasets 722

Manage Restricted Features 457, 534, 534

Manage Rollups 457, 536

Manage States 91

Manage Tags 457

Manage Units 648, 708

Manange Countries/Currencies 469 NOL Temporary Differences 426

NOL Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 167, 294 Payable Entry 171

Permanent Differences 174, 417, 423, 440, 443

Plugin Reports 457, 538

Pre-Tax Book Income 440, 441

Reporting Datasets 378, 404 Spreadsheet Import (Dataset) 558 State 31

State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 204, 436

State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 209, 436

State Details 27, 93, 261 State Payable Entry 217

State Permanent Differences 214

State Rates 81

State Tax Adjustments 220, 436, 439

State Tax After Apportionment Temporary Differences 438

State Tax After Tax Temporary Differences 437 State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 224 States 436, 436

Tax Accounts 440, 442

Tax Adjustments 184, 417, 428

Tax Basis/Return Mappings 434, 434 Tax Loss Temporary Differences 417 Temp Diffs - Bk Tx Basis 447 Temporary Difference 59

Temporary Difference Activity - Book/Tax Basis 440 Temporary Difference Activity - Tax Basis 440 Temporary Difference BSO Adjustments 440 Temporary Differences 417, 424, 445

Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 196 Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 187, 444 Trial Balance Lines 430, 430

Trial Balance SubLines 430, 431

Trial Balance/Tax Basis 201, 298, 448, 713

Trial Balances 440

Unit 31

Unit Details 27, 93, 348, 604, 726, 727, 728, 728

Unit Mapping 449

Unit Sub-Consolidations 417, 419, 708

Units 417, 417

View Audit Trail 35, 457, 542

View Categories Audit Trail 35, 457, 545

Scrunch 398

Scrunch Macro 399

Self Reconciling Reports 253 Separate Attribute Basis 726 Sequential Reporting Datasets 408 Software upgrade 15

Source Codes 27

Source Tags 27

Special Characters 774 Spreadsheet Import (Dataset) 556 SQL 538

SQL Server Utility BCP 565

SqlLdr 565

SQL Statements 538

State 89

State After Apportionment Temporary Differences - Tax Basis

Import 204


State After Tax Temporary Differences - Tax Basis Import 209

State Codes 740 State Payable Entry

Import 217

State Permanent Differences Equity Adjustments 214

Import 214

P&L Adjustments 214

State Provision 25 State Reports

Deferred Balances 251

Legacy Tax Provision 251 Payable Detail 251

Payable Rollforward 251 State Est Pymt 251

Tax Provision 251

State Summary 307 State Summary Reports

Deferred Balances 251

Expected Deferred Rate 251 Forecasted State Rate Report 251 Provision Summary 251

State Est Pymt Summary 251 State/Unit Summary 251

State Tax Adjustments Add 439

Cash 220

Delete 439

Import 220, 439

Non-Cash 220

State Tax After Apportionment Temporary Differences Add 438

Delete 438

Import 438

State Tax After Tax Temporary Differences Add 437

Delete 437

Import 437

State Temporary Differences

After Apportionment - Tax Basis 204 State Temporary Differences - Tax Basis

Import 224

States 93, 313, 317

Add 436

Delete 436

Import 436

Statutory Tax Rates 663, 667

Stock Based Compensation 711 Stock Options 159, 711

Style sheets 468

XSL 538

Sub-consolidations 24, 26, 708

Add 419

Child 708

Delete 419

Import 419

Parent 708

Summary 38

Support 15

System Codes 20, 21

System Files 468

System Parameter 26

CC_DISABLE_STATES 436

ENABLE_APICPOOL 159

FISCAL_MONTHS_OFFSET 701

SHOW_EXPECTEDDEFERRED 313

USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR_Default 605, 606

System Parameters 534, 604, 643, 711

Add 534

ALLOWMULTICURRENCYREPORT 648, 758

BRIDGE_ALLOW_ALL_UNITS 758

BRIDGE_ALLOW_SUBCON_SELECT 758

BRIDGE_ALLOW_UNIT_SELECT 758

BRIDGE_DEFAULT_TAG 758

BSOS_XXXX 758

CASE_INSENSITIVE_LOGIN 758

CC_DISABLE_STATES 758

CLIENTDISPLAYNAME 758

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_COLUMN 758

DEF_RF_SUMMATION_NAME 758

DefEndBalDefault 758

Delete 534

DISABLE_DEFERREDPROVONLY 181, 758

DISABLE_RDS_CONSTRAINTS 758

EFFRATEBRKOUT 270, 274, 758

ENABLE_APICPOOL 304, 712, 758

EXTENDED_USER_RESTRICTION 758

FILTER#_NAME 758

FILTER#_SQL 758

FISCAL_MONTHS_OFFSET 758

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_AUTOCALC 758

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_MANUALCALC 758

FLOWTHROUGHFACTORS_USE_FX 758

FORMAT_FOR_EXCEL 758

GAAPTOSTAT# 264, 758


System Parameters 534, 604, 643, 711

GLOBAL_XSL 468, 758

GLOBAL_XSL_BROWSEUPDATE 758

GLOBAL_XSL_SAVEAS 758

GlobalRegion 758

gstags# 264, 758

Import 534

JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_FEDERAL_XXX 758

JE_COMPONENT_FILTER_STATE_XXX

758

JE_COMPONENT_ROLLUP_SET_CODE

690, 758

JE_DATASET_DELETE_ALL 758


JE_FILTER# 690, 758


JE_FILTER_NAME# 690, 758


JE_ROUNDING_DECIMAL_PLACES 758

JE_SHOW_ZERO_BOOKCALCS 758

JE_SHOW_ZERO_TAXCALCS 758

JE_STATE_GROUP_%_STATE## 690, 758

JE_STATE_GROUP_NAME_# 690, 758

JE_Supplemental_Label#

758

JE_TAG_GROUP_#_NAME

690, 758

JE_TAG_GROUP_#_TAGS

690, 758

JE_TYPE_LOCKED 758


JE_UNIT_DELETE_ALL 758

LIMIT_PAYABLE_DATES 705, 758

LockoutMinutes 758

MaxFailLogins 758

PassHistNum 758

POST_BSO 723, 758

POST_DO 723, 758

POST_STATE 723, 758

PRINTFORMAT_PAGESWIDE 758

PROVISION_HIDE_STATES 758

PROVSCBRKOUT 708, 758

REPORT_FOOTER 758

REPORT_HEADER 758

ReportingCurrencySymbol 758

SEPARATESTATE# 758

SHOW_ADVANCEDLIABILITY 758

SHOW_BRIDGEUNITMAP 449, 758

SHOW_CASHPYMTS 758

SHOW_CTA 649, 658, 758

SHOW_DATABASEANALYZER 758

SHOW_DEFBALCSCBRKOUT 758

SHOW_EFFRATECONSOLPTBIPCT 708, 758

SHOW_EFFRATECSCBRKOUT 708, 758

SHOW_EXPECTEDDEFERRED 758

SHOW_GAAPTOSTAT 264, 758

SHOW_JE 689, 758

SHOW_LIABILITY 758

SHOW_OUTPUTJE 689, 758

SHOW_PAYABLERECLASS 758

SHOW_PLUGINDEV 538

SHOW_SIMPLELIABILITY 758

SHOW_WORKPAPER 758

STATE_BREAKOUT_UNIT 758

TSPasswordExpireDays

758

TSPasswordMinDigits

758

TSPasswordMinLength

758

USE_OLD_AMTESTIMATOR 758

USE_SPDEFBALREPORTS 758

USE_SPPROVISIONREPORTS 758

USE_SPPROVSUMMARYREPORTS 758

UserExtended 758 System Pararmeters

CLIENTDISPLAYNAME 710

REPORT_FOOTER 710

REPORT_HEADER 710


- T -

Tag 94

Tag letter 38

Tag Letters 27, 470, 473

Tag name 27

Tags 93

Tax Adjustments 714, 715, 719

Add 428

Cash 184

Delete 428

Import 184, 428

Non-Cash 184, 722, 722, 726

Tax Basis 201, 434, 434

Tax Basis Balance Sheet 434, 434, 603, 712, 713, 713

Tax Basis/Return Mapping 435, 435 Tax Basis/Return Mapping line 434 Tax Contingencies 731

Tax Months 398

Tax Provision 18, 394, 716

Tax Reclasses 201

Tax Return 434, 434

Tax Return Income Statement 434 Tax Return Mappings 434

Tax Return process 731

Taxes Payable account 648, 696, 714 Taxes Per Book

Import 116


TaxStream Format 556

Temporary Differences 25, 32, 445

Add 424

After Tax 723

After Tax - Book/Tax Basis 155 After Tax - Tax Basis 151

After-Tax 398

After-Tax Temporary Differences 726 Amortized 398, 398

Amortized After-Tax 398, 398

Amortized After-Tax Temporary Differences 726 Amortized Temporary Differences 726

Delete

424

Federal

398

Import

424

NOL 167, 398, 398, 723


Provision 723


Return 723


State 398, 398


State After Tax - Tax Basis

209

State After-Apportionment

398, 398

State After-Tax 398


Unit 398


Temporary Differences - Book/Tax Basis 447 Import 196

Temporary Differences - Tax Basis 444 Import 187

Tentative Minimum Tax 605 Terminology 16

Tiered Sub-consolidations 708 Total Current Provision 715 Transaction Buckets 171, 217

Transaction Types 171, 217, 704

Trial Balance 116, 201, 430, 430, 431, 448, 712

Trial Balance Accounts 448, 712, 713, 713

Trial Balance Acoounts 443, 444, 445, 446, 447

Trial Balance Lines 431, 713

Add 430

Delete 430

Import 430

Trial Balance Mapping 713 Trial Balance Subline 713

Trial Balance SubLines 201, 430, 434, 448, 713

Add 431

Delete 431

Import 431

Trial Balance/Tax Basis Import 201

True-up 714, 722

True-up Dataset 715 True-ups

Balance Sheet Only RTP 723

Deferred Only 723 Deferred Only RTP 723

Temporary Difference Activity 723 Truncate Audit Trail 534

TS Database Analyzer 351, 671

Types

Current 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204, 209, 224

Equity Adjustment 184, 220

Non-Current 151, 155, 167, 187, 196, 204, 209, 224

P&L Adjustment 184, 220


- U -

Uncertain Tax Positions 729 Uncertain Tax Postions 731 Unit 27, 648, 671, 731

Unit Dataset Extensions (UserNum9) 116 Unit Dataset Parameters

JE_CALCULATE_ENTRIES 772

PAYABLE_CPROV_BUCKET 772

PAYABLE_RTP_BUCKET 772

PAYRECUNIT 772

Unit records 31

Unit State Dataset Parameters PAYABLE_CPROV_BUCKET 773

PAYABLE_RTP_BUCKET 773

Unit Tax Rates 650, 652, 654, 656

Units 24, 332, 346

Add 417

Delete 417

Import 417 Users

Administrative 556, 562

Read/Write 93, 556, 562

UTP Application 729, 731


- V -

Valuation Allowance automation 21, 603 Valuation Allowance Parameters

VA_CALCTYPE 728, 728

Valuation Allowances

Aggregated Attribute Basis 726, 728, 729


Valuation Allowances

Aggregated Attribute Post-Tax Basis 728, 729

Automation 727, 728, 728, 729

Separate Attribute Basis 726, 727

Valuation Alowances 187, 224


Year Expired 398

Year Generated 398


© 2016Thomson Reuters. All rights reserved.

Republication or redistribution of Thomson Reuters content, including by framing or similar means, is prohibited w ithout the prior w ritten consent of Thomson Reuters. 'Thomson Reuters' and the Thomson Reuters logo are registered trademarks and trademarks of Thomson Reuters and its affiliated companies.


For more information

Send us a sales enquiry at thomsonreuters.com/about/contact_us

Read more about our products at thomsonreuters.com/products_services Find out how to contact your local office thomsonreuters.com/about/locations.